Yamaha HTR-5990 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: HTR-5990

Categorie: Ontvanger

Type: de handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

HTR-5590

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

Printed in Malaysia V958320-2

OWNER’S MANUAL

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of this unit in the

space below.

MODEL:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.

Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future

reference.

AV Receiver

HTR-5590

I CAUTION

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

• Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,

within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert

you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous

voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may

be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of

electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral

triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of

important operating and maintenance (servicing)

instructions in the literature accompanying the

appliance.

1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions

should be read before the product is operated.

2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions

should be retained for future reference.

3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the

operating instructions should be adhered to.

4 Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions

should be followed.

5 Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before

cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.

Use a damp cloth for cleaning.

6 Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended

by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.

7 Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water –

for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or

laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;

and the like.

8 Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,

stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,

causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious

damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,

bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold

with the product. Any mounting of the product should

follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a

mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.

9 A product and cart combination should be

moved with care. Quick stops, excessive

force, and uneven surfaces may cause the

product and cart combination to overturn.

10 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided

for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the

product and to protect it from overheating, and these

openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings

should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,

sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not

be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or

rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the

manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to.

11 Power Sources – This product should be operated only from

the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If

you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,

consult your product dealer or local power company. For

products intended to operate from battery power, or other

sources, refer to the operating instructions.

12 Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped

with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having

one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the

power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you

are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try

reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact

your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not

defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.

13 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be

routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched

by items placed upon or against them, paying particular

attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the

point where they exit from the product.

14 Lightning – For added protection for this product during a

lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for

long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and

disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent

damage to the product due to lightning and power-line

surges.

15 Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be

located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other

electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such

power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna

system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching

such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be

fatal.

16 Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension

cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result

in a risk of fire or electric shock.

17 Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind

into this product through openings as they may touch

dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result

in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on

the product.

18 Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself

as opening or removing covers may expose you to

dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to

qualified service personnel.

19 Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the

wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel

under the following conditions:

a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,

b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into

the product,

c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONSIMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

CAUTION II

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS

UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the

instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC

requirements. Modifications not expressly approved

by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the

FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to

accessories and/or another product use only high

quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this

product MUST be used. Follow all installation

instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void

your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to

comply with the requirements listed in FCC

Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices.

Compliance with these requirements provides a

reasonable level of assurance that your use of this

product in a residential environment will not result in

harmful interference with other electronic devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and,

if not installed and used according to the instructions

found in the users manual, may cause interference

harmful to the operation of other electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee

that interference will not occur in all installations. If

this product is found to be the source of interference,

which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and

“ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one

of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon

lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory

results, please contact the local retailer authorized to

distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the

appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics

Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA

90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING

MAST

GROUND

CLAMP

ANTENNA

LEAD IN

WIRE

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

(NEC SECTION 810–20)

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

(NEC SECTION 810–21)

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

ELECTRODE SYSTEM

(NEC ART 250. PART H)

ELECTRIC

SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

NEC

– NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system

installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that

provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular,

specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the

grounding system of the building, as close to the point of

cable entry as practical.

d) If the product does not operate normally by following

the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls

that are covered by the operating instructions as an

improper adjustment of other controls may result in

damage and will often require extensive work by a

qualified technician to restore the product to its normal

operation,

e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any

way, and

f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in

performance - this indicates a need for service.

20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are

required, be sure the service technician has used

replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have

the same characteristics as the original part.

Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric

shock, or other hazards.

21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or

repairs to this product, ask the service technician to

perform safety checks to determine that the product is in

proper operating condition.

22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted

to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the

manufacturer.

23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat

sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other

products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or

cable system is connected to the product, be sure the

antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some

protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.

Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA

70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of

the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in

wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding

conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection

to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the

grounding electrode.

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual

carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.

2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean

place — away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,

dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at

least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and

20 cm on the back of this unit.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances,

motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from

cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with

high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent

condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical

shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto

this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping

or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:

– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or

discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid

may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to

this unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,

etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature

inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,

and/or personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections

are complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,

possibly causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet,

grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might

damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this

unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and

may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage

resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than

specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cord

from the wall outlet during an electrical storm.

14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified

YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed.

The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.

15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time

(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall

outlet.

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on

common operating errors before concluding that this unit is

faulty.

17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this

unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug

from the wall outlet.

18 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (For China model only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit

must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging

into the AC main supply.

Voltages are 220/240 V AC, 50 Hz.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,

DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as

long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit

itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In

this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small

quantity of power.

FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to

wide slot and fully insert.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian

ICES-003.

III CAUTION

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer

Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment

by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through

loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most

importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing.

Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often

undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the

Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer

Electronics Group recommend you to avoid

prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS ............................................................ 1

FEATURES ............................................................. 2

GETTING STARTED ............................................ 3

Checking the Package Contents ................................ 3

Installing Batteries in the Remote Control ................ 3

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4

Front Panel ................................................................ 4

Remote Control ......................................................... 6

Using the Remote Control ......................................... 7

Front Panel Display ................................................... 8

Rear Panel ................................................................. 9

PREPARATION

SPEAKER SETUP ............................................... 10

Speakers to Be Used ................................................ 10

Speaker Placement .................................................. 10

Connecting the Speakers ......................................... 11

CONNECTIONS .................................................. 14

Before Connecting Components ............................. 14

Connecting Video Components ............................... 14

Connecting Audio Components .............................. 17

Connecting the Antennas ......................................... 19

Connecting to a Subwoofer ..................................... 20

Connecting to the 6CH INPUT Jacks ..................... 20

Connecting the Power Supply Cords ....................... 21

Turning on the Power .............................................. 22

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD) .......................... 23

OSD Modes ............................................................. 23

Selecting the OSD Mode ......................................... 23

SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS .......................... 24

Summary of SPEAKER SET Items 1A through 1G ...

ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT

LEVELS ............................................................ 25

Before You Begin .................................................... 25

Using the Test Tone (TEST DOLBY SUR.) ........... 25

BASIC OPERATION

BASIC PLAYBACK ............................................. 27

Input Modes and Indications ................................... 29

Selecting a Sound Field Program ............................ 30

Selecting PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC or Neo: 6

... 31

DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING

(DSP) ................................................................. 34

Understanding Sound Fields ................................... 34

Hi-Fi DSP Programs................................................ 34

CINEMA-DSP ........................................................ 34

Straight Decode ....................................................... 35

Sound Field Effect ................................................... 35

Features of DSP Programs ...................................... 36

Table of Program Names for Each Input Format .... 38

TUNING ................................................................ 39

Automatic and Manual Tuning ................................ 39

Presetting Stations ................................................... 40

Tuning in to a Preset Station ................................... 42

Exchanging Preset Stations ..................................... 42

BASIC RECORDING .......................................... 43

ADVANCED OPERATION

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ................... 44

Control Area ............................................................ 44

Setting the Manufacturer Code ............................... 45

Learn Feature ........................................................... 47

Changing the Source Name in the Display

Window ............................................................... 48

Clearing Learned Functions, Renamed Source

Names, and Setup Manufacturer Codes .............. 49

Each Component Control Area ............................... 50

SET MENU ........................................................... 55

Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU.................. 55

1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) ............ 56

2 LOW FRQ TEST ................................................ 59

3 L/R BALANCE (balance of the left and right

main speakers)..................................................... 60

4 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) ........ 60

5 CENTER GEQ (center graphic equalizer) .......... 60

6 INPUT RENAME ............................................... 61

7 I/O ASSIGNMENT ............................................. 61

8 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) .................... 62

9 PARAM. INI (parameter initialization) .............. 63

10LFE LEVEL ........................................................ 63

11D-RANGE (dynamic range) ............................... 63

12SP DELAY .......................................................... 64

13DISPLAY SET .................................................... 65

14MEMORY GUARD ............................................ 65

156CH INPUT SET ................................................ 65

ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT

SPEAKERS ....................................................... 66

SLEEP TIMER ..................................................... 67

Setting the Sleep Timer ........................................... 67

Canceling the Sleep Timer ...................................... 67

ZONE 2 (For U.S.A., Canada and Australia

models) .............................................................. 68

Remote Control in Zone 2 ....................................... 69

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER

EDITING .......................................................... 70

What is a Sound Field? ............................................ 70

Sound Field Program Parameters ............................ 70

Changing Parameter Settings .................................. 71

Resetting a Parameter to the Factory-set Value ....... 71

DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER

DESCRIPTIONS .............................................. 72

TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................... 76

GLOSSARY .......................................................... 81

SPECIFICATIONS .............................................. 83

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks

of Dolby Laboratories.

“DTS”, “DTS-ES Extended Surround” and “Neo: 6” are

trademarks of Digital Theater System, Inc.

FEATURES

Built-in 6-Channel Power Amplifier

◆ Minimum RMS Output Power

(0.04% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8Ω)

Main: 100 W + 100 W

Center: 100 W

Rear: 100 W + 100 W

Rear center: 100 W

Multi-Mode Digital Sound Field

Processing

◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic Decoder

◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX Decoder

◆ DTS/DTS ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS

Neo: 6 Decoder

◆ CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP

Technology and Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital

or DTS

◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP

◆ SILENT CINEMA DSP

Sophisticated AM/FM Tuner

◆ 40-Station Random Access Preset Tuning

◆ Automatic Preset Tuning

◆ Preset Station Shifting Capability (Preset

Editing)

Other Features

◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A Converter

◆ “SET MENU” which Provides You with 15 Items

for Optimizing This Unit for Your Audio/Video

System

◆ Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker Balance

Adjustment

◆ 6-Channel External Decoder Input for Other

Future Formats

◆ BASS EXTENSION Button for Reinforcing

Bass Response

◆ On Screen Display Function Helpful in

Controlling This Unit

◆ S Video Signal Input/Output Capability

◆ Component Video Input/Output Capability

◆ Video Conversion (S Video → Composite Video)

◆ Optical and Coaxial Digital Audio Signal Jacks

◆ Sleep Timer

◆ Remote Control with Preset Manufacturer Codes

and “Learning” Capability

◆ PROCESSOR DIRECT for no alteration of the

original signal

◆ Custom Installation Facility (U.S.A., Canada and

Australia models only)

• y indicates a tip for your operation.

• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button

names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses in this

manual.

• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part for the purpose of the improvement

in operativity and others. In this case the product has priority.

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

PHONO

POWER SLEEP

CLEAR

LEARN

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

RE–NAME

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/LD

POWER

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOL

LEVEL

STEREO

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

SELECT

EX/ES

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

TEST

ON SCREEN

EFFECT

CHP/INDEX

TV VOL

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHURCH

CHCH

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

TITLE

MUTE

POWER

AMP

AVTV

VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD

SELECT

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER CD

–

3421

910

11 12

67 8

1 Press the part and slide the battery

compartment cover off.

2 Insert four supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM-

4) according to the polarity markings on the

inside of the battery compartment.

3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.

■ Notes on batteries

• Change the batteries periodically.

• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.

• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline

and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging

carefully as these different types of batteries may have

the same shape and color.

■ Changing batteries

As the batteries lose power, the operating range of the

remote control decreases and the indicator does not flash

or its light becomes dim. When you notice any of these

conditions, change all of the batteries.

Notes

• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately.

Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into

contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment

thoroughly before installing new batteries.

• If the remote control is without batteries for more than

2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote

control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the

memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the

manufacturer code and program any acquired functions that

may have been cleared.

AM loop antenna

(For Australia model)

Indoor FM antenna

(For U.S.A., Canada and

China models)

Batteries (4)

(AAA, R03, UM-4)

Remote control

GETTING STARTED

Checking the Package Contents

Check your package to make sure it has the following items.

Installing Batteries in the Remote Control

BASS

VOLUME

VIDEO AUXSILENT

PROGRAM

STEREO

SPEAKERS

6CH INPUT MODE

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET

TUNING

PHONES

EFFECT

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

TUNER

STANDBY

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

DSP

TREBLE

–

DIGITAL

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

FM/AM

1 32 45 6 7

90 q

iopu

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

Front Panel

1 STANDBY/ON

Turns on and sets this unit in the standby mode. When

you turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will

be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce

sound.

Standby mode

In this mode, this unit consumes a small amount of

power to receive infrared-signals from the remote

control.

2 6CH (INPUT)

Selects the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks.

The source selected by pressing 6CH (INPUT) takes

priority over the source selected with INPUT (or the input

selector buttons on the remote control).

3 INPUT selector

Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch.

4 (INPUT) MODE

Sets the priority for the types of input signals (AUTO,

DTS, ANALOG) to receive when one component is

connected to two or more input jacks of this unit (see

page 29). Priority cannot be set when 6CH INPUT is

selected as the input source.

5 Remote control sensor

Receives signals from the remote control.

6 Front panel display

Shows information about the operational status of this

unit.

7 VOLUME

Controls the output level of all audio channels.

This does not affect the REC OUT level.

8 SPEAKERS A/B

Turn on or off the set of main speakers connected to the A

and/or B terminals on the rear panel at each time its

corresponding button is pressed.

9 BASS EXTENSION

Turns on or off the BASS EXTENSION function at each

time the button is pressed, this feature boosts the bass

frequency of the left and right main channels by +6 dB

(60 Hz) while maintaining overall tonal balance. This

boost is useful if you do not use a subwoofer.

0 PROCESSOR DIRECT

Turns on or off the PROCESSOR DIRECT function at

each time the button is pressed. When this is on, BASS,

TREBLE, and BASS EXTENSION are bypassed,

eliminating any alteration of the original signal.

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

ATUR

AL SOU

ND AV RECEIVER

TR-5990

To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel.

q STEREO/EFFECT

Switches the normal stereo or DSP effect reproduction.

When STEREO is selected, 2-channel input signals are

directed to the main left and right speakers without effect

sounds. All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals except

for the LFE channel are mixed down to the main left and

right speakers.

w A/B/C/D/E

Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E).

e PROGRAM l / h

Selects the DSP program.

r PRESET/TUNING l / h

Selects preset station number 1 to 8 when the colon (:)

appears next to the band indication on the front panel

display, and selects the tuning frequency when the colon

(:) does not appear.

t PHONES jack

Outputs audio signals for private listening with

headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals

are output to the OUTPUT jacks or to the speakers.

(There is an exception depending on the “1G SP B SET”

setting on the SET MENU.)

y VIDEO AUX jacks

Inputs audio and video signals from a portable external

source such as a game console. To reproduce source

signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input

source.

u PRESET/TUNING (EDIT)

Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h (the

colon (:) turns on or off) between selecting a preset

station number and tuning.

This button is also used to exchange the assignment of

two preset stations with each other.

i FM/AM

Switches the reception band between FM and AM.

o MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

Stores a station in the memory. Hold down this button for

more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning.

p TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

Switches the tuning mode between automatic and manual.

To select the automatic tuning mode, press this button so

that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel

display. To select the manual tuning mode, press this

button so that the “AUTO” indicator does not light up.

a BASS

Adjusts the low-frequency response for the left and right

main channels.

Turn the control to the right to increase or to the left to

decrease the low-frequency response.

s TREBLE

Adjusts the high-frequency response for the left and right

main channels.

Turn the control to the right to increase or to the left to

decrease the high-frequency response.

Note

• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-

frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the

center and rear speakers may not match that of the left and

right main speakers.

■ Opening and closing the front

panel door

When you want to use the controls behind the front panel

door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part

of the panel. When you are not using them, close the door.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

PHONO

POWER SLEEP

CLEAR

LEARN

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

RE–NAME

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/LD

POWER

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOL

LEVEL

STEREO

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

SELECT

EX/ES

0 +10

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

TEST

ON SCREEN

EFFECT

CHP/INDEX

TV VOL

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHURCH

CHCH

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

TITLE

MUTE

POWER

AMP

AVTV

VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD

SELECT

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER CD

–

3421

910

11 12

67 8

Remote Control

This section describes the controls and their functions of

the remote control to operate this unit. Functions written

in yellow are to operate this unit. Make sure that the AMP

mode is selected before operating this unit.

The functions written in green and white vary depending

on the input source selected.

1 Infrared window

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate (see “Using the Remote

Control” on page 7).

2 TRANSMIT indicator

Flashes while the remote control is sending signals.

3 STANDBY

Sets this unit in the standby mode.

4 SYSTEM POWER

Turns on the power of this unit.

Sets the remote control to operate other components (not

necessarily connected to this unit) without changing this

unit’s input source (see page 54).

6 Input selector buttons

Select the input source and change the control area (see

“REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on pages 44 to 54).

7 Display window

Shows the selected source component that you are

controlling.

8 TV POWER

Turns on and off the power of the TV.

9 Operation Section

Provides functions such as play, stop, skip, etc. for

operating your other components.

0 LEVEL (TITLE)

Selects the effect speaker channel to be adjusted and sets

the level.

q Cursor buttons u / d / j / i

Selects and adjusts DSP program parameters and SET

MENU items.

TV MUTE/SELECT button mutes your TV volume and

selects menu items of your DVD player when their

manufacture codes are set.

w TEST (RETURN)

Outputs the test tone to adjust the speaker levels.

e DSP program (Numeric) buttons

Select DSP programs.

r RE-NAME

Used for changing the input source name in the display

window (see page 48).

t CLEAR

Used for clearing functions acquired when using the learn

and rename features, and set manufacturer codes (see

pages 48, 49).

y LEARN

Used for setting up the manufacturer code or for

programming the functions of other remote controls (see

pages 45-47).

u SLEEP

Sets the sleep timer.

i 6CH INPUT

Selects the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks.

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

BASS

VOLUME

VIDEO AUXSILENT

PROGRAM

STEREO

SPEAKERS

6CH INPUT MODE

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET

TUNING

PHONES

EFFECT

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

TUNER

STANDBY

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

DSP

TREBLE

–

DIGITAL

30° 30°

Approximately 6 m (20 feet)

o SELECT k/n

Selects the another component to control independently

from the input that has been selected by pressing an input

selector button.

p AV POWER

Turns on and off the power of the component selected by

the input selector button.

a AMP

Selects AMP or other component selected by the input

selector button.

s VOL +/–

Increases or decreases the volume level.

d MUTE

Mutes the sound. The MUTE indicator turns on when the

MUTE function is on. Press again to restore the audio

output to the previous volume level.

f SET MENU (MENU)

Selects the SET MENU mode.

g ON SCREEN (DISPLAY)

Displays the operation status of this unit and the

parameter settings for DSP programs on the monitor (see

page 23).

h STEREO/EFFECT

Switches the normal stereo or DSP effect reproduction.

When STEREO is selected, 2-channel input signals are

directed to the main left and right speakers without effect

sounds. All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals except

for the LFE channel are also directed to the main left and

right speakers.

Using the Remote Control

The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam.

Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote

control sensor on the main unit during operation.

■ Handling the remote control

• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote

control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

• Do not leave or store the remote control in the

following types of conditions:

– high humidity or temperature such as near a heater,

stove or bath;

– dusty places; or

– in places subject to extremely low temperatures.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

LCR

RC RR

LFE

VIRTUAL

DTS

Neo

MOVIE TV THEATER

ENTERTAINMENT12

DOLBY DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX

DSP

MATRIXDISCRETE

PCM

SILENT

DIGITAL

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

STEREO

TUNED

MEMORY

P. DIRECT

BASS

MUTE VOLUME

SLEEP

AUTO

PRO LOGIC

0q r tyui o ap

1456789

w e

DSP

indicator

Lights up when you select a digital sound field program.

2 Decoder indicators

When any of the decoders equipped on this unit

functions, the indicator lights up.

3 VIRTUAL indicator

Lights up when using Virtual CINEMA DSP (see page

32).

4 Input source indicator

Shows the current input source with a cursor.

5 AUTO indicator

Shows that this unit is in the automatic tuning mode.

6 SLEEP indicator

Lights up while the sleep timer is on.

7 MUTE indicator

Flashes while the MUTE function is on.

8 BASS indicator

Lights up while BASS EXTENSION is on.

9 VOLUME level indicator

Indicates the volume level.

0 v indicator

Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code

modulation) digital audio signals.

q SILENT indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected with the sound

effect (see “SILENT CINEMA DSP” on page 32).

w SP A B indicator

Lights up according to which set of main speakers is

selected. Both indicators light up when both sets of

speakers are selected.

e Headphones indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected.

r DSP program indicators

The name of the selected DSP program lights up when

the ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE THEATER 1, MOVIE

THEATER 2, TV THEATER or V/DTS SURROUND

DSP program is selected.

t Multi-information display

Shows the current DSP program name and other

information when adjusting or changing settings.

y STEREO indicator

Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an

FM stereo broadcast while the “AUTO” indicator is lit.

u TUNED indicator

Lights up when this unit tunes in to a station.

i MEMORY indicator

Flashes to show a station can be stored.

o P. DIRECT

Lights up while PROCESSOR DIRECT is on.

p Input channel indicator

Indicates the channel components of input signals being

received.

LFE

indicator

Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal.

Front Panel Display

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

AC OUTLETS

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

VIDEO

DIGITAL OUTPUT

DIGITAL

INPUT

6CH INPUT

GND

AUDIO AUDIO VIDEO

CONTROL

OUT

SPEAKERS

TUNER

REMOTE

75Ω

UNBAL.

OUT

ANT

GND

FM ANT

+12V

15mA

MAX.

COMPONENT VIDEO

S VIDEO

DVD

D-TV

/LD

CBL

/SAT

VIDEO

/ C

DVD

MONITOR

OUT

CBL

/SAT

MAIN

REAR

CENTER CENTER

OUTPUT

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

SUB

WOOFER

/ C

OPTICAL

TAPE

(

PLAY

)

(

PLAY

)

OUT

(

REC

)

OUT

(

REC

)

CD-R

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DVD

CBL

/SAT

PHONO

OUT

ZONE 2 OUT

VCR 2

/DVR

VCR 1

MAIN

SURROUND

D-TV

/LD

(SURROUND)

COAXIAL

–

MAIN A OR B:

A+B:

CENTER

4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

REAR CENTER

MAIN A OR B:

CENTER

REAR

REAR CENTER

9 0 e rq

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks

2 Audio component jacks

See pages 17 and 18 for connection information.

3 Video component jacks

See pages 14 to 16 for connection information.

4 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks (U.S.A., Canada and

Australia models only)

See page 69 details.

5 CONTROL OUT (U.S.A., Canada and Australia

models only)

This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use.

6 AC power cord

Connect to a power outlet.

7 AC OUTLETS

Use these outlets to supply power to your other A/V

components (see page 21).

8 DIGITAL INPUT jacks

9 6CH INPUT jacks

See page 20 for connection information.

0 ZONE 2 OUT jacks (U.S.A., Canada and

Australia models only)

See page 68 for details.

q Antenna input terminals

See page 19 for connection information.

w SUBWOOFER jacks

See page 20 for connection information.

e Speaker terminals

See pages 11 and 12 for connection information.

r IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

Use this switch to match the amplifier output to your

speaker impedance (see page 13). Set this unit in the

standby mode before you change the setting of this

switch.

< China model only >

FREQUENCY STEP switch

See page 19.

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

See page 21.

*1 As this terminal is used for an examination in the factory, do not

connect any equipment to this terminal.

Rear Panel

SPEAKER SETUP

Speakers to Be Used

This unit has been designed to provide the best sound-

field quality with a 6-speaker system, using left and right

main speakers, left and right rear speakers, and a center

and rear center speakers. If you use different brands of

speakers (with different tonal qualities) in your system,

the tone of a moving human voice and other types of

sound may not shift smoothly. We recommend that you

use speakers from the same manufacturer or speakers

with the same tonal quality.

The main speakers are used for the main source sound

plus the effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers

from your present stereo system. The rear speakers are

used for the effect and surround sounds, and the center

speaker is for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If

for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker,

you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained

with the full system.

The main speakers should be high-performance models

and have enough power-handling capacity to accept the

maximum output of your audio system. The other

speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For

precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use the

models of equivalent performance with the main

speakers.

■ Use of a subwoofer expands your

sound field

It is also possible to further expand your system with the

addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is

effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from

any or all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE

(low-frequency effect) channel with high fidelity when

the Dolby Digital signal or the DTS signal is played back.

The YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer

System is ideal for natural and lively bass reproduction.

PREPARATION

Speaker Placement

Refer to the following diagram when you place the

speakers.

■ Main speakers

Place the left and right main speakers an equal distance

from the ideal listening position. The distance of each

speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the

same.

■ Center speaker

Align the front face of the center speaker with the front

face of your video monitor. Place the speaker as close to

the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under the

monitor and centrally between the main speakers.

■ Rear speakers

Place these speakers behind your listening position,

facing slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (6 feet) above the

floor.

■ Rear center speaker

Place the rear center speaker in the center between the left

and right rear speakers at the same height from the floor

as the rear speakers.

■ Subwoofer

The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because

low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better

to place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it

slightly toward the center of the room to reduce the wall

reflections.

CAUTION

Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of

speakers still creates the interference with a monitor,

place the speakers away from the monitor.

Main

speaker (L)

1.8 m (6 feet)

Rear speaker (L)

Rear center

speaker

Rear speaker (R)

Subwoofer

Main speaker (R)Center speaker

Note

• If you do not use any effect speakers (rear, center and/or rear

center), change the settings of SPEAKER SET items in the

SET MENU to designate the signals to other terminals you

connect speakers to.

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SPEAKER SETUP

Connecting the Speakers

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are

faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound

will be unnatural and lack bass.

CAUTION

• Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit.

• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other and do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could

damage this unit and/or speakers.

If necessary, use the SET MENU to change the speaker mode settings according to the number and size of the speakers

in your configuration after you finish connecting your speakers.

■ Speaker cables

A speaker cable is actually a pair of insulated cables

running side by side. One of the cables is colored or

shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge.

1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of

insulation from each of the speaker cables.

2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable

together to prevent short circuits.

■ Connecting to the SPEAKERS terminals

1 Unscrew the knob.

2 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side

of each terminal.

3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.

(For U.S.A., Canada, Australia and China models)

• Banana plug connections are also possible. First, tighten the

knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of

the corresponding terminal.

10 mm (3/8”)

■ MAIN SPEAKERS terminals

One or two speaker systems can be connected to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either

of the MAIN A or B terminals.

■ REAR SPEAKERS terminals

A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals.

■ CENTER SPEAKER terminals

A center speaker can be connected to these terminals.

■ REAR CENTER SPEAKER terminals

A rear center speaker can be connected to these terminals.

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Banana plug

SPEAKER SETUP

AC OUTLETS

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

VIDEO

DIGITAL OUTPUT

DIGITAL

INPUT

6CH INPUT

GND

AUDIO AUDIO VIDEO

CONTROL

OUT

SPEAKERS

TUNER

REMOTE

75Ω

UNBAL.

OUT

ANT

GND

FM ANT

+12V

15mA

MAX.

COMPONENT VIDEO

S VIDEO

DVD

D-TV

/LD

CBL

/SAT

VIDEO

/ C

DVD

MONITOR

OUT

CBL

/SAT

MAIN

REAR

CENTER CENTER

OUTPUT

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

SUB

WOOFER

/ C

OPTICAL

TAPE

(

PLAY

)

(

PLAY

)

OUT

(

REC

)

OUT

(

REC

)

CD-R

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DVD

CBL

/SAT

PHONO

OUT

ZONE 2 OUT

VCR 2

/DVR

VCR 1

MAIN

SURROUND

D-TV

/LD

(SURROUND)

COAXIAL

–

MAIN A OR B:

A+B:

CENTER

4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

REAR CENTER

MAIN A OR B:

CENTER

REAR

REAR CENTER

6745

Subwoofer

system

Rear Center

speaker

Main B speaker

Center

speaker

(U.S.A. and Canada

models)

Right

Rear speaker

■ SUBWOOFER jack

When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,

connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or

rear channels are directed to this jack if they are assigned to this jack. (The cut-off frequency of this jack is 90 Hz.) The

LFE (low-frequency effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed if they are

assigned to this jack.

Note

• Depending on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” and “10 LFE LEVEL” on the SET MENU, some signals may not be output from

the SUBWOOFER jack.

Right Left

Main A speaker

Right Left

Left

The diagram above shows the speaker layout in the

listening room.

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SPEAKER SETUP

AC OUTLETS

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

MAIN A OR B:

A+B:

CENTER

4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

REAR CENTER

MAIN A OR B:

CENTER

REAR

REAR CENTER

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

MAIN A OR B:

A+B:

CENTER

4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

REAR CENTER

MAIN A OR B:

CENTER

REAR

REAR CENTER

Switch

position

Left

Right

Speaker

Main

Center

Rear

Center

Rear

Main

Center

Rear

Center

Rear

Impedance level

If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of

each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher.

If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of

each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.

The impedance must be 6 Ω or higher.

The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher.

If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of

each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.

If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of

each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher.

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.

The impedance must be 8 Ω or higher.

The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.

IMPEDANCE

SELECTOR

switch

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

■ IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

WARNING

Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power of this unit is on, otherwise this unit

may be damaged.

If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

switch may not be fully slid to either position. If so, slide the switch to either position fully when this unit is in the

standby mode.

Select the left and right position according to the impedance of the speakers in your system. Be sure to move this switch

only when this unit is in the standby mode.

Before Connecting Components

CAUTION

Never connect this unit and other components to mains

power until all connections between components have

been completed.

• Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to

say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to

“–”. Some components require different connection

methods and have different jack names. Refer to the

operation instructions for each component to be

connected to this unit.

• Use commercially available video pin cables when

connecting to the S VIDEO and COMPONENT

VIDEO jacks.

Connecting Video Components

■ About the video jacks

There are three types of video jacks.

VIDEO jacks transmit composite signals.

S VIDEO jacks transmit S-video signals.

S-video signals are separated into

luminance (Y) and color (C) video signals

to achieve high-quality color

reproduction.

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks transmit

component signals.

Component signals are separated into

luminance (Y) and color difference (P

B /

B, PR/CR) to provide the best quality in

picture reproduction.

Refer to the owner’s manuals for your monitor and other

components being connected to reproduce these signals

correctly.

You can connect an S-video output and component video

output of your video components to this unit. Connect an

S-video output to the S VIDEO jack and component video

output to the COMPONENT VIDEO jack on this unit.

CONNECTIONS

S VIDEO VIDEO

L AUDIO R OPTICAL

VIDEO AUX

AUDIO OUT R

AUDIO OUT L

VIDEO OUT

OPTICAL OUT

S VIDEO OUT

Game

console or

video camera

VIDEO

VIDEO jack

S VIDEO

S VIDEO jack

COMPONENT VIDEO

PR/ CR PB/ CB Y

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

• The COMPONENT VIDEO jacks on this unit are independent

of the S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks.

• Connection depends on the availability of input jacks on your

monitor. The signals input through the S VIDEO jacks can be

converted to composite signals inside of this unit and output

through the VIDEO jacks on this unit as well.

• When signals input through both S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks,

signals input through the S VIDEO jack has priority.

• You can designate the input for the COMPONENT VIDEO A

and B jacks according to your component by using “7 I/O

ASSIGNMENT” on the SET MENU (see pages 61 and 62 for

details).

Note

• When you are using the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks, check

the details in the owner’s manual that came with the component

being connected.

■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front

panel)

These jacks are used to connect any video input source

such as a game console and a camcorder to this unit.

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONNECTIONS

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

VIDEO

DIGITAL OUTPUT

DIGITAL

INPUT

6CH INPUT

GND

AUDIO AUDIO VIDEO

TUNER

75Ω

UNBAL.

ANT

GND

FM ANT

COMPONENT VIDEO

S VIDEO

DVD

D-TV

/LD

CBL

/SAT

VIDEO

PR/ CR

DVD

MONITOR

OUT

CBL

/ SAT

CENTER

OUTPUT

SUB

WOOFER

PB/ CB Y

OPTICAL

TAPE

(

PLAY

)

(

PLAY

)

OUT

(

REC

)

OUT

(

REC

)

CD-R

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DVD

CBL

/SAT

PHONO

OUT

ZONE 2 OUT

VCR 2

/DVR

VCR 1

MAIN

SURROUND

D-TV

/LD

COAXIAL

–

L R

VVC

S S

L R

COMPONENT

INPUT

S VIDEO

INPUT

VIDEO

INPUT

S VIDEO

OUTPUT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

AUDIO OUTPUT

COAXIAL OUTPUT

OPTICAL OUTPUT

AUDIO OUTPUT

COMPONENT OUTPUT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

S VIDEO

OUTPUT

V V V

indicates S-video cables

indicates video pin cables

indicates coaxial cables

indicates optical cables

indicates right audio pin cables

indicates left audio pin cables

indicates signal direction

Video

monitor

TV/digital TV or

LD player

(U.S.A. and Canada

models)

DVD player

indicates component video cables

CONNECTIONS

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

VIDEO

DIGITAL OUTPUT

DIGITAL

INPUT

6CH INPUT

GND

AUDIO AUDIO VIDEO

TUNER

75Ω

UNBAL.

ANT

GND

FM ANT

COMPONENT VIDEO

S VIDEO

DVD

D-TV

/LD

CBL

/SAT

VIDEO

PR/ CR

DVD

MONITOR

OUT

CBL

/ SAT

PB/ CB Y

OPTICAL

TAPE

(

PLAY

)

(

PLAY

)

OUT

(

REC

)

OUT

(

REC

)

CD-R

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DVD

CBL

/SAT

PHONO

OUT

ZONE 2 OUT

VCR 2

/DVR

VCR 1

MAIN

SURROUND

D-TV

/LD

COAXIAL

COMPONENT

INPUT

L R

S S S

L R L R

S VIDEO OUTPUTVIDEO OUTPUT

AUDIO OUTPUT

OPTICAL OUTPUT

S VIDEO

INPUT

S VIDEO

OUTPUT

S VIDEO INPUT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

VIDEO

INPUT

AUDIO INPUT

AUDIO OUTPUT

VIDEO

INPUT

COMPONENT OUTPUT

V V V

VVV

indicates S-video cables

indicates video pin cables

indicates optical cables

indicates right audio pin cables

indicates left audio pin cables

indicates signal direction

Video

monitor

(U.S.A. and

Canada

models)

VCR 1 or VCR 2/

DVR (digital

video recorder)

Cable TV or

Satellite tuner

indicates component video cables

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONNECTIONS

Connecting Audio Components

■ Connecting to digital jacks

This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of

digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables.

You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital

and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to

both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given

to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital

input jacks are acceptable for 96-kHz sampling digital

signals.

• You can designate the input for each digital jacks according to

your component by using “7 I/O ASSIGNMENT” on the SET

MENU (see pages 61 and 62 for details).

About the dust protection cap

Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect

the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you

are not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back

in place. This cap protects the jack from dust.

Notes

• DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks and analog OUT (REC) jacks are

independent. Only digital signals are output from DIGITAL

OUTPUT jacks and analog signals from OUT (REC) jacks.

• The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard.

If you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this

standard, this unit may not function properly.

■ Connecting a turntable

PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM

or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with

a low-output MC cartridge, use an in-line boosting

transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to

these jacks.

• Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in

the signal. However you may hear less noise without the

connection to the GND terminal for some record players.

■ Connecting a CD player

• The COAXIAL CD and OPTICAL CD jacks are available for a

CD player which has coaxial or optical digital output jacks.

• When you connect a CD player to both the COAXIAL CD and

OPTICAL CD jacks, priority is given to the input signals from

the COAXIAL CD jack.

■ Connecting an MD recorder, tape

deck or CD recorder

• DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks and analog OUT(REC) are

independent. Only digital signals are output from DIGITAL

OUTPUT jacks and analog signals from OUT(REC) jacks.

• When you connect your recording component to both the

analog and digital input and output jacks, the priority is given

to the digital signal.

Notes

• When you connect a recording component to this unit, keep its

power on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit may

distort the sound from other components.

• When you record from a source component connected to this

unit while this unit is set in the standby mode, the recorded

sound may be distorted. To avoid this problem, turn on this

unit.

CONNECTIONS

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

DIGITAL OUTPUT

DIGITAL

INPUT

6CH INPUT

GND

AUDIO

OPTICAL

TAPE

(

PLAY

)

(

PLAY

)

OUT

(

REC

)

OUT

(

REC

)

CD-R

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DVD

CBL

/SAT

PHONO

MAIN

SURROUND

D-TV

/LD

COAXIAL

L R L R

L R

L R L RL R

OPTICAL INPUT

OPTICAL OUTPUT

INPUT

OUTPUT

OPTICAL INPUT

OUTPUT

GND

MAIN OUTPUT

SURROUND

OUTPUT

SUBWOOFER

OUTPUT

CENTER OUTPUT

OPTICAL

OUTPUT

COAXIAL OUTPUT

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

indicates coaxial cables

indicates optical cables

indicates right audio pin cables

indicates left audio pin cables

indicates signal direction

External decoder

See page 20

Turntable

CD player

CD recorder

MD recorder or

tape deck

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONNECTIONS

■ Connecting the AM loop antenna

1 Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it.

2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop

antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and

GND terminals.

3 Orient the AM loop antenna for the beat

reception.

• The AM loop antenna can be removed from the stand and

attached to a wall, etc.

Notes

• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.

• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an

outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.

A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer

reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor

reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the

quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA

dealer or service center about the outdoor antennas.

Connecting the Antennas

Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal

strength.

Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals.

■ Connecting the indoor FM

antenna

Connect the included indoor FM antenna to the 75Ω

UNBAL. FM ANT terminal.

FREQUENCY STEP switch (For China model)

Because the interstation frequency spacing

differs in different areas, set the

FREQUENCY STEP switch (locating on

the rear panel) according to the frequency

spacing in your area.

North, Central and South America:

100 kHz/10 kHz

Other area: 50 kHz/9 kHz

Before setting this switch, disconnect the

AC power plug of this unit from the AC

outlet.

Ground (GND terminal)

For maximum safety and minimum

interference, connect the antenna GND

terminal to a good earth ground. A good

earth ground is a metal stake driven into

moist earth.

Indoor FM

antenna

(included)

AM loop antenna

(included)

TUNER

75Ω

UNBAL.

ANT

GND

FM ANT

COMPONENT VIDEO

/ C

ITOR

/ C

100kHz/10kHz

FREQUENCY

STEP

50kHz/9kHz

FM AM

CONNECTIONS

Connecting to the 6CH INPUT

Jacks

This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left

and right MAIN, CENTER, left and right SURROUND

and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from

an external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier.

Connect the output jacks on your external decoder to the

6CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right

outputs to the left and right input jacks for the main and

surround channels.

Notes

• When 6CH INPUT is selected, the signals input to the 6CH

INPUT jacks have priority over any other input source.

• When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, this unit

automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and

you cannot listen to DSP programs.

• When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, settings of

“1 SPEAKER SET (1A to 1E)” on the SET MENU do not

apply.

• When headphones are used, only main L/R channels are

output.

• Setting for “15 6CH INPUT SET” on the SET MENU will be

applied when 6CH INPUT is selected.

Connecting to a Subwoofer

SUBWOOFER jack

When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including

the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer

System, connect the input jack of the subwoofer system

to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main,

center and/or rear channels are directed to this jack if they

are assigned to this jack. (The cut-off frequency of this

jack is 90 Hz.) The LFE (low-frequency effect) signals

generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also

directed if they are assigned to this jack.

Notes

• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on

the subwoofer. It is also possible to adjust the volume level by

using the remote control of this unit (see ADJUSTING THE

LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS on page 66).

• Depending on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” and “10 LFE

LEVEL” on the SET MENU, some signals may not be output

from the SUBWOOFER jack.

OUTPUT

SUB

WOOFER

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONNECTIONS

Connecting the Power Supply Cords

■ Connecting the AC power cord

Plug this unit into the wall outlet.

Plug in the other components connected to this unit to the

wall outlet.

■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)

U.S.A., Canada and China models ............... 2 OUTLETS

Australia model .............................................. 1 OUTLET

Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your

components to this unit. The power to the AC

OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON

(or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). These outlets

will supply power to any connected component whenever

this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power

consumption of components) that can be connected to the

AC OUTLET(S) is:

U.S.A. and Canada models ...................................... 80 W

China model ............................................................. 50 W

Australia model ...................................................... 100 W

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

AC OUTLETS

EDANCE SELECTOR

BEFORE POWER ON

A OR B:

A+B:

4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

IN A OR B:

NTER

AR CENTER

To AC outlet

AC OUTLETS

PEDANCE SELECTOR

T BEFORE POWER ON

N A OR B:

A+B:

TER

4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

16ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER

R CENTER

MAIN A OR B:

CENTER

REAR

REAR CENTER

A+B

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(China model)

■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(China model only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit

must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE

plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/

220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.

CONNECTIONS

Turning on the Power

When all connections are completed, turn on the power of

this unit.

1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on

the remote control) to turn on the power of

this unit.

2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

BASS

VOLUME

VIDEO AUXSILENT

PROGRAM

STEREO

SPEAKERS

6CH INPUT MODE

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET

TUNING

PHONES

EFFECT

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

TUNER

STANDBY

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

DSP

TREBLE

–

DIGITAL

PHONO

POWER SLEEP

CLEAR

LEARN

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

RE–NAME

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/LD

POWER

REC

POWER

AMP

AVTV

VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD

SELECT

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER CD

STANDBY

/ON

POWER

SYSTEM

Remote control

Front panel

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

Selecting the OSD Mode

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Press AMP to select the

AMP mode.

AMP appears in the display

window on the remote control.

3 Press ON SCREEN on the

remote control repeatedly

to change the display

mode.

The OSD mode changes in the following order: full

display, short display, and display off.

Notes

• If your video monitor is connected only to the COMPONENT

VIDEO jacks of this unit, the OSD is not shown. Make sure to

connect your video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO

jacks and either VIDEO or S VIDEO jacks if you want to see

the OSD.

• Playing back video software that has an anti-copy signal or

video signals with a lot of noise may produce unstable images.

P01 CONCERT HALL

INIT.DLY…………45ms

ROOM SIZE…………1.O

LIVENESS…………………5

≥ DSP LEVEL…………0dB

P01 CONCERT HALL

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD)

You can display the operation information for this unit on

a video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and DSP

program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much easier

to see the available options and parameters than it is by

reading this information on the front panel display.

• If a video source is being reproduced, the OSD is

superimposed over the image.

• The OSD signal is not output to the REC OUT jack, and will

not be recorded with any video signal.

• You can set the OSD to turn on (gray background) or off when

a video source is not being reproduced (or the source

component is turned off) by using “13 DISPLAY SET” on the

SET MENU (see page 65).

OSD Modes

You can change the amount of information the OSD

shows.

Full display

This mode always shows the DSP program parameter

settings on the video monitor.

Short display

This mode briefly shows the same contents as the front

panel display at the bottom of the screen and then

disappears.

Display off

This mode briefly shows the “DISPLAY OFF” message at

the bottom of the screen and then disappears. Afterwards,

no changes to operations appear on the monitor except

those of the ON SCREEN button.

Full display Short display

• When you choose the full display mode, INPUT, VOLUME

and some other types of operation information are displayed at

the bottom of the screen in the same format as that for the front

panel display.

• The SET MENU and test tone display appear regardless of the

OSD mode.

AMP

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

POWER

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOL

LEVEL

STEREO

TEST

ON SCREEN

EFFECT

TV VOL

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

TITLE

MUTE

POWER

AMP

AVTV

SELECT

–

Item

1A CENTER SP

1B MAIN SP

1C REAR L/R SP

1D REAR CT SP

1E LFE/BASS OUT

1F MAIN LEVEL

1G SP B SET

Description

Selects the output mode according to whether or not a center speaker is

being used and its performance.

Selects the output mode according to the performance of the main

speakers.

Selects the output mode according to whether or not rear L/R speakers

are being used and their performance.

Selects the Rear Center channel output according to the size of the Rear

Center speaker.

Selects the speaker according to use for LFE signal output and low bass

signal.

Selects the main speaker level.

Select the location of the main speakers to be connected to the

SPEAKERS B terminals.

Control value (default

setting indicated in bold)

LRG/SML/NONE

LARGE/SMALL

LRG/SML/NONE

SWFR/MAIN/BOTH

Normal/–10 dB

MAIN / ZONE B

SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS

This unit has 6 SPEAKER SET items on the SET MENU that you must set according to the number of speakers in your

configuration and their size. The following table summarizes these SPEAKER SET items, and shows the initial settings

as well as other possible settings.

If the initial settings shown in the following table are not appropriate for your speaker configuration, change settings

following the steps described in “1 SPEAKER SET” from pages 56 to 59.

Summary of SPEAKER SET Items 1A through 1G

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

Using the Test Tone (TEST DOLBY

SUR.)

Use the test tone to balance the output levels of the

speakers required for a surround sound system. The

adjustment of each speaker output level should be made at

your listening position with the remote control. After

completing the adjustments, use VOL +/– at your

listening position to check if the adjustments are

satisfactory.

POWER

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOL

LEVEL

STEREO

TEST

ON SCREEN

EFFECT

TV VOL

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

TITLE

MUTE

POWER

AMP

AVTV

SELECT

–

2,5

1 Press AMP to select the

AMP mode.

AMP appears in the display

window on the remote control.

2 Press TEST to output the

test tone.

3 Adjust the volume of this

unit so you can hear the

test tone.

This section explains how to adjust the speaker output

levels by using the test tone generator. When this

adjustment is made, the output level heard at the listening

position will be the same from each speaker. This is

important for the best performance of the digital sound

field processor, and various decoders (Dolby Digital,

Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Pro Logic

, DTS, DTS ES, and

DTS Neo: 6).

Note

• Since this unit cannot enter the test mode while headphones are

connected to this unit, be sure to unplug the headphones from

the PHONES jack when using the test tone.

Before You Begin

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Press SPEAKERS A or B

to select the main

speakers to be used.

If you are using two sets of the

main speakers, press both A

and B.

3 Set the BASS and TREBLE controls on the

front panel to the center position and turn off

BASS EXTENSION and PROCESSOR

DIRECT by pressing the buttons.

“BASS EXT. OFF” and “P. DIRECT OFF” appear

on the front panel display.

TEST

RETURN

AMP

BASS

TREBLE

–

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

SPEAKERS

ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS

Set to OFF.

BASS

VOLUME

VIDEO AUXSILENT

PROGRAM

STEREO

SPEAKERS

6CH INPUT MODE

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET

TUNING

PHONES

EFFECT

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

TUNER

STANDBY

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

DSP

TREBLE

–

DIGITAL

VOL

–

ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS

4 Adjust the output level of

the effect speakers using

j / i so the output level

coming from the effect

speakers is the same as

that of the main speakers.

While adjusting, the test tone

is heard from the selected

speaker.

Note

• The output level of the main speakers cannot be adjusted here.

5 When the adjustment is

complete, press TEST to

stop the test tone.

Notes

• The tonal quality of the center speaker can be adjusted by using

“5 CENTER GEQ” on the SET MENU (see page 60).

• If “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the

center channel sound is automatically output from the left and

right main speakers.

• If “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the

output level of the rear right, left and center speakers cannot be

adjusted in step 4. The test tone will be circulated in the order

of LEFT→CENTER→RIGHT→SUBWOOFER→LEFT...,

skipping the rear right and left speakers and the rear center

speaker.

• If “1D REAR CT SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the

out level of the rear center speaker cannot be adjusted in step 4.

The test tone will be circulated in the order of

LEFT→CENTER→RIGHT→RIGHT SURROUND→LEFT

SURROUND→SUBWOOFER→LEFT ..., skipping the rear

center speaker.

• It is not necessary to readjust the speaker level once it is set as

long as you do not change the speakers. You can enjoy listening

to or watching the input source with the desired volume by

adjusting the volume key.

• You can increase the output levels of the effect speakers

(center, left rear and right rear and rear center) to +10 dB. If the

output level of these speakers is lower than that of the main

speakers even after you have increased the output level of these

speakers up to +10 dB, set “1F MAIN LEVEL” on the SET

MENU to –10 dB (see page 59). This setting decreases the

main speaker output level to about one-third of the normal

level. After you have set “1F MAIN LEVEL” on the SET

MENU to –10 dB, adjust the levels for the center and rear

speakers again.

The test tone is heard from the left main speaker,

center speaker, right main speaker, right rear speaker,

rear center and left rear speaker in order. The tone is

produced for 2.5 seconds each time.

The state of the test tone output is also shown on the

monitor by an image of the audio listening room.

This is convenient for adjusting each speaker level.

Front panel display also indicates from which

speaker the test tone is output in the order of TEST

LEFT→TEST CENTER→TEST RIGHT→

TEST R SUR.→TEST REAR CNTR→TEST L SUR.

→TEST SUBWOOFER

Note

• If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set this

unit in the standby mode and check the speaker connections.

LEFT

TEST DOLBY SUR.

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

LEFT SURROUND RIGHT SURROUND

CENTER

REAR CENTER

RIGHT

LEFT

SUBWOOFER

TEST

RETURN

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

BASIC PLAYBACK

1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on

the remote control) to turn on the power.

2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

3 Press SPEAKERS A or B

to select the main

speakers to be used.

If you are using two sets of

main speakers, press both A

and B. The speaker indicator(s)

for the selected set(s) lights up

on the front panel display.

4 Rotate INPUT (or press one of the input

selector buttons on the remote control) to

select the input source.

The current input source name and input mode

appear on the front panel display and on the video

monitor for a few seconds.

Note

• The input source names correspond to the jack names on the

rear panel of this unit, not the names of the component

connected to this unit.

To select a source connected to the 6CH INPUT

jacks

Press 6CH (INPUT) until “6CH INPUT” appears on the

front panel display and on the video monitor.

Notes

• If “6CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display and on

the video monitor, no other source can be played. To select

another input source with INPUT (the input selector buttons on

the remote control), press 6CH (INPUT) to turn off “6CH

INPUT” from the front panel display and the video monitor.

• If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the 6CH

INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video

source and then press 6CH (INPUT).

INPUT

PHONO

POWER SLEEP

CLEAR

LEARN

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

RE–NAME

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/LD

POWER

REC

POWER

AMP

AVTV

VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD

SELECT

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER CD

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOL

LEVEL

STEREO

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

SELECT

EX/ES

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

TEST

ON SCREEN

EFFECT

CHP/INDEX

TV VOL

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHURCH

CHCH

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

TITLE

MUTE

–

3421

910

11 12

67 8

PHONO

AUX

TV/LD VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER CD

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX 1

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

VOLUME

DVD AUTO

BASS

VOLUME

VIDEO AUXSILENT

PROGRAM

STEREO

SPEAKERS

6CH INPUT MODE

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET

TUNING

PHONES

EFFECT

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

TUNER

STANDBY

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

DSP

TREBLE

–

DIGITAL

464

STANDBY

/ON

POWER

SYSTEM

SPEAKERS

Remote control

Front panel

Selected input source

6CH

6CH INPUT

Remote controlFront panel

BASIC PLAYBACK

5 Start playback or select a broadcast station

on the source component.

Refer to the operation instructions for the

component.

Note

• If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or encoded

signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may

be disturbed due to those signals.

6 Adjust the volume to the desired output

level.

If desired, use BASS, TREBLE and BASS

EXTENSION. These controls are only effective for

sound from the main speakers.

Notes

• If the component connected to the VCR 1 OUT, VCR 2/DVR

OUT, CD-R OUT and MD/TAPE OUT jacks is turned off, the

reproduced sound may be distorted or the volume may be

lowered for the characteristics of AV receivers. In this case,

turn on the component.

• BASS EXTENSION may not be effective if “1B MAIN SP” on

the SET MENU is set to SMALL and “1E LFE/BASS OUT” is

set to SWFR.

7 Select a DSP program if desired.

Use PROGRAM l / h (DSP program buttons on

the remote control) to select a DSP program. See

pages 30 to 33 for details about the DSP program.

VOL

–

VOLUME

BASS

TREBLE

–

Front panel

Remote control

■ BGV (background video) function

The BGV function allows you to combine a video image

from a video source with a sound from an audio source.

For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music

while having beautiful scenery from the video source on

the video monitor.

Select a source from the video group and then select a

source from the audio group with the input selector

buttons on the remote control. This selection for BGV

cannot be made with INPUT on the front panel.

■ To mute the sound

Press MUTE on the

remote control.

To resume the audio output,

press MUTE again.

• You can also cancel mute to press any operation buttons such as

VOL +/–.

• During muting, the “MUTE” indicator flashes on the front

panel display.

• When this unit enters the standby mode, the mute function will

be cancelled.

■ When you have finished using

this unit

Press STANDBY/ON (STANDBY on the

remote control) to set this unit in the

standby mode.

PROGRAM

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

SELECT

EX/ES

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

3421

910

11 12

67 8

Front panel Remote control

STANDBY

/ON

STANDBY

Front panel

Remote control

MUTE

BASS

EXTENSION

PHONO

AUX

TV/LD VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER CD

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

BASIC PLAYBACK

Input Modes and Indications

This unit comes with various input jacks. You can set the

priority of the input signal among different types of input

signals.

Press MODE (the input selector button that

you have pressed to select the input source

on the remote control) repeatedly until the

desired input mode is shown on the front

panel display and on the video monitor.

AUTO: In this mode, the input signal is

automatically selected in the following

order:

1) Digital signal

2) Analog signal

DTS: In this mode, only the digital input signal

encoded with DTS is selected even if

another signal is input at the same time.

ANALOG: In this mode, only the analog input signal is

selected even if a digital signal is input at

the same time.

Notes

• If digital signals are input from both the COAXIAL and

OPTICAL jacks, the digital signal from the COAXIAL jack

has precedence over the OPTICAL jack.

• In playing the disc encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS on

some LD or DVD players, the sound output delays for a

moment when playback resumes after a search because the

digital signal is selected again.

• When playing the LD source that has not been digitally

recorded, the sound may not be output for some LD players. In

this case, set the input mode to ANALOG.

• When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the

type of signal. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS

signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate

setting.

• When you turn on the power of this unit, the input mode is set

according to “8 INPUT MODE” on the SET MENU (see page

62 for details).

MODE

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX 1

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

VOLUME

DVD AUTO

PHONO

AUX

TV/LD VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER CD

Remote controlFront panel

Input mode

■ Notes on the digital signal

The digital input jacks of this unit can handle up to a

96 kHz sampling digital signal. Both OPTICAL and

COAXIAL input jacks can be used to input the digital

signal up to 48 kHz. However when inputting a higher

digital signal than 48 kHz, be aware of the following

points.

• DSP programs cannot be selected. Sound will be output as

normal 2-channel stereo sound from only the left and right

main speakers.

• Use the coaxial input (COAXIAL IN) jack to input over

96 kHz digital signals. The signals may not be correctly played

back if the optical input (OPTICAL IN) jack is used.

• Level adjustment for effect speakers other than a subwoofer is

not possible.

■ Notes on playing DTS-CD/LDs

• If the digital output data of the player has been

processed in any way, you may not be able to perform

DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection

between this unit and the player.

• If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and

set the input mode to ANALOG, this unit reproduces

the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. When you

want to play a DTS source, be sure to connect the

source to a digital input jack and set the input mode to

AUTO or DTS.

• If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while

playing a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit

reproduces no sound.

• If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal with

the input mode set to AUTO;

– This unit automatically switches to the DTS-

decoding mode (The “t” indicator lights up.)

after having detected the DTS signal. When playback

of the DTS source is completed, the “t” indicator

may flash. While this indicator is flashing, only DTS

source can be played. If you want to play a normal

PCM source soon, set the input mode back to AUTO.

– The “t” indicator may flash when a search or

skip operation is performed while the DTS source is

playing back with the input mode set to AUTO. If

this status continues for longer than 30 seconds, this

unit will automatically switch from “DTS-decoding”

mode to PCM digital signal input mode. The “t”

indicator will turn off.

BASIC PLAYBACK

Selecting a Sound Field Program

You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a

DSP program. There are 10 programs with sub-programs

available with this unit. However the selection depends on

the input signal format and not all the sub-programs are

possible for all input signal formats. For details about

each program, see pages 34 to 38.

1 Press AMP to select the

AMP mode.

2 Press PROGRAM l / h (one of the numeric

buttons on the remote control) to select the

desired program.

The name of the selected program appears on the

front panel display and on the video monitor.

AMP

BASS

VOLUME

VIDEO AUXSILENT

PROGRAM

STEREO

SPEAKERS

6CH INPUT MODE

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET

TUNING

PHONES

EFFECT

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

TUNER

STANDBY

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

DSP

TREBLE

–

DIGITAL

PHONO

POWER SLEEP

CLEAR

LEARN

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

RE–NAME

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/LD

POWER

REC

POWER

AMP

AVTV

VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD

SELECT

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER CD

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOL

LEVEL

STEREO

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SELECT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

TEST

ON SCREEN

EFFECT

CHP/INDEX

TV VOL

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHURCH

CHCH

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

TITLE

MUTE

–

3421

910

11 12

67 8

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

EX/ES

2,3

3 After selecting the desired program, press

the same button repeatedly to select the

desired sub-program if available.

For example, to select the sub-program “70 mm Sci-

Fi”, press MOVIE THEATER 1 repeatedly.

Notes

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects

the last DSP program used with that source.

• When you set this unit in the standby mode, the current source

and DSP program are memorized and are automatically

selected when you turn on the power again.

• If a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input when the input mode

is set to AUTO, the DSP program (No. 8–10) automatically

switches to the appropriate decoding program.

• When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/

Normal or PRO LOGIC/Enhanced, PRO LOGIC Movie, or

Neo: 6 Cinema, no sound will be heard from the main speakers

and the rear speakers. Sound can only be heard from the center

speaker. However, if “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is

set to NONE, the center channel sound is output from the main

speakers.

• When a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit

is selected, the digital sound field processor cannot be used.

• When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, the

DSP program cannot be selected. In this case, the sound is

reproduced as normal 2-channel stereo.

• Choose a DSP program based on your listening preference, and

not on the name of the program. The acoustics of your listening

room affect the DSP program. Minimize the sound reflections

in your room to maximize the effect created by the program.

MOVIE THEATER

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX

DSP

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

VOLUME

PRO LOGIC

70mm Sci-Fi

PROGRAM

Sub-program name

Program name

Front panel

Remote control

MOVIE THEATER

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX

DSP

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

VOLUME

PRO LOGIC

70mm Spectacle

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

EX/ES

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SELECT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

3421

910

11 12

67 8

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

EX/ES

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SELECT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

3421

910

11 12

67 8

Program name

Sub-program name

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

BASIC PLAYBACK

3 Select a decoder.

Press SELECT to select PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC

or Neo: 6.

4 Select a subprogram suitable for the source.

The selection switches as follows each time

/DTS

SUR. is pressed.

• When PRO LOGIC is selected

Normal ↔ Enhanced

• When PRO LOGIC is selected

Movie ↔ Music

• When Neo: 6 is selected

Cinema ↔ Music

Note

• PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC and Neo: 6 decoders can decode

only 2-channel sources.

Selecting PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC

or Neo: 6

You can enjoy the 2-channel sources decoded into five or

six discrete channels by selecting PRO LOGIC

or Neo:

6 in the program No. 10.

1 Select a 2-channel source and start playback

on the source component.

2 (Operating using the front panel)

Select a decoder and subprogram.

Press PROGRAM l / h on the front panel

repeatedly to select PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC

, or Neo: 6.

(Operating using the remote control)

Press

/DTS SUR. on the remote control.

The previously selected sub program appears on the

front panel display.

96/24

DOLBY DIGITAL

PRO

LOGIC

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX 1

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

VOLUME

PRO LOGIC

~~~PRO~LOGIC I

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SELECT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

3421

910

11 12

67 8

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

EX/ES

Remote control

BASS

VOLUME

VIDEO AUXSILENT

PROGRAM

STEREO

SPEAKERS

6CH INPUT MODE

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET

TUNING

PHONES

EFFECT

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

TUNER

STANDBY

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

DSP

TREBLE

–

DIGITAL

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOL

LEVEL

STEREO

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SELECT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

TEST

ON SCREEN

EFFECT

CHP/INDEX

TV VOL

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHURCH

CHCH

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

TITLE

MUTE

–

3421

910

11 12

67 8

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

EX/ES

2,3,4

PROGRAM

Front panel

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SELECT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

3421

910

11 12

67 8

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

EX/ES

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SELECT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

3421

910

11 12

67 8

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

EX/ES

BASIC PLAYBACK

■ Playing the Dolby Digital EX or

DTS ES software

Press EX/ES to turn on the Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES

decoder to listen to the Dolby Digital EX and DTS ES

software with a rear center speaker.

Press EX/ES to select the mode. (The modes that can be

selected vary depending on the format of the software to

play.)

AUTO: This mode automatically switches Dolby

Digital EX/DTS ES Matrix 6.1/DTS ES

Discrete 6.1 depending on the signal in the

input source that this unit can detect. Rear

center speaker does not work for 5.1 channel

sources.

Discrete 6.1: This mode can be selected only when the

source with DTS ES Discrete format has

been detected. (The DISCRETE indicator

lights up.)

Matrix 6.1: This mode makes 6-channel playback of the

input source through the Matrix 6.1 decoder.

(Either

or MATRIX indicator lights

up.)

OFF: Rear center speaker does not work in this

mode.

Notes

• Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal (flag)

which this unit can automatically detect. When playing these

kinds of discs with 6.1-channel, select “Matrix 6.1”.

• 6.1-channel playback is not possible even if EX/ES is pressed

in the following cases:

1 When “1C REAR L/R SP”is set to “NONE”.

2 When the sound effect is turned off.

3 When the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jack is

being played.

4 When Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.

5 When the power of this unit is turned off, the input mode

will be reset to AUTO.

6 When headphones are connected.

EX/ES

CHP/INDEX

LCR

LFE

MOVIE THEATER

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX

DSP

DIGITAL

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

VOLUME

Matrix 6.1 ~

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP

With the Virtual CINEMA DSP, you can enjoy all the

DSP programs without rear speakers. It creates the virtual

speakers to reproduce the natural sound field.

The sound field processing is changed to the Virtual

CINEMA DSP mode according to the selected DSP

program by setting “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET

MENU to NONE.

Note

• This unit is not set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if

“1C REAR L/R SP” is set to NONE in the following cases:

– when the 6ch Stereo, DOLBY DIGITAL Normal, Pro Logic

Normal, Pro Logic , DTS Normal or Neo: 6 program is

selected;

– when the sound effect is turned off;

– when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source;

– when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit;

– when using the test tone; or

– when connecting the headphones.

■ SILENT CINEMA DSP

You can enjoy the powerful sound field as if there were

actual speakers with the SILENT CINEMA DSP. You can

listen to SILENT CINEMA DSP by connecting your

headphones to the PHONES jack while the digital sound

field processor is on. Enjoy all the DSP program using the

headphones. The “SILENT” indicator lights up on the

front panel display. (If the sound effect is off, you listen to

the source with normal stereo reproduction.)

Note

• This unit is not set in the SILENT CINEMA DSP mose even if

the sound effect is on in the following cases:

–when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source

–when over 48 kHZ sampling digital signals are being input

(Example: when playing the Dolby Digital EX software)

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

BASIC PLAYBACK

Front panel

Remote control

STEREO

EFFECT

STEREO

EFFECT

■ Normal Stereo Reproduction

Press STEREO/EFFECT to turn off the sound

effect for normal stereo reproduction.

Press STEREO/EFFECT again to turn the sound

effect back on.

Notes

• If “1B MAIN SP” on the SET MENU is set to “SMALL” and

“1E LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SW”, or “1E LFE/BASS

OUT” is set to “BOTH”, the LFE signals will be output from

the subwoofer.

• If you turn off the sound effect while a Dolby Digital or DTS

signal is being output, the dynamic range of the signal is

automatically compressed and the sounds of the center and rear

speaker channels are mixed and output from the main speakers.

• The volume may be greatly reduced when you turn off the

sound effect or if you set “11 D-RANGE” on the SET MENU

to MIN. In this case turn on the sound effect.

■ Displaying the information about

the input source

You can display the information such as the type, format

and sampling frequency of the signal input from the

component connected to this unit during stereo

reproduction.

(While playing a source)

1 Press AMP to select the AMP mode.

2 Press d/u to display the information about

the input signal.

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP)

Understanding Sound Fields

A sound field is defined as the “characteristic sound reflections of a

particular space.” In concert halls and other music venues, we hear

early reflections and reverberations as well as the direct sound

produced by the artist(s). The variations in the early reflections and

other reverberations among the different music venues is what gives

each venue its special and recognizable sound quality.

YAMAHA sent teams of sound engineers all around the world to

measure the sound reflections of famous concert halls and music

venues, and collect detailed sound field information such as the

direction, strength, range, and delay time of those reflections. Then

we stored this enormous amount of data in the ROM chips of this

unit.

Hi-Fi DSP Programs

Recreating the sound field of a concert hall or an opera house requires localizing the virtual sound sources in your

listening room. The traditional stereo system that uses only two speakers is not capable of recreating a realistic sound

field. YAMAHA’s DSP requires four effect speakers to recreate sound fields based on the measured sound field data.

The processor controls the strength and delay time of the signals output from the four effect speakers to localize the

virtual sound sources in a full circle around the listener.

CINEMA-DSP

Filmmakers intend the dialog to be located right on the screen, the effect sound a little farther back, the music spread

even farther back, and the surround sound around the listener. Of course, all of these sounds must be synchronized with

the images on the screen.

CINEMA-DSP is an upgraded version of YAMAHA DSP specially designed for movie soundtracks. CINEMA-DSP

integrates the DTS, Dolby Digital, and Dolby Pro Logic surround sound technologies with YAMAHA DSP sound field

programs to provide the surround sound field. It recreates the most complete movie sound design in your audio room. In

CINEMA-DSP sound field programs, YAMAHA’s exclusive DSP processing is added to the right and left Main and

Center channels, so the listener can enjoy realistic dialogue, depth of sound, smooth transition between sound sources,

and a surround sound field that goes beyond the screen.

When a DTS or Dolby Digital signal is detected, the CINEMA-DSP sound field processor automatically chooses the

most suitable sound field program for that signal.

L SURROUND SOUND FIELD

R SURROUND SOUND FIELD

PRESENCE SOUND FIELD

DIALOG

EFFECT MUSIC

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP)

Sound Field Effect

The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without

using matrix processing. This unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs provide the same quality of sound and sound

localization that 6-channel soundtracks do. The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality

sound designed for movie theaters into your home. With this unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs, you can recreate a

dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being at a public theater in your listening room by using Dolby Digital or

DTS technology.

■ Dolby Digital/DTS + DSP sound field effect

These programs use YAMAHA’s tri-field DSP processing

on each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front,

left surround and right surround channels. This processing

enables this unit to reproduce the immense sound field

and surround expression of a Dolby Digital- or DTS-

equipped movie theater without sacrificing the clear

separation of all channels.

■ Dolby Digital EX/DTS ES + DSP sound field effect

These programs provide you with the maximum experience of the spacious surround effects since an extra rear center

DSP sound field created from the rear center channel is added.

■ Dolby Pro Logic + DSP sound field effect

Most movie software has 4-channel (left, center, right and

surround) sound information encoded by Dolby Surround

matrix processing and stored on the left and right tracks.

These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro Logic

decoder. The MOVIE THEATER programs for 2-channel

sources are designed to recreate the spaciousness and

delicate nuances of sound that tend to be lost in the

encoding and decoding processes.

■ Dolby Pro Logic /DTS Neo: 6

Dolby Pro Logic and DTS Neo: 6 equipped on this unit decode the 2-channel Dolby Surround software into five or

six full range channels. They also provide two modes; MOVIE/CINEMA for movies and MUSIC for 2-channel sources.

Surround DSP

sound field

Right surround DSP

sound field

Presence DSP

sound field

Left surround DSP

sound field

Presence DSP

sound field

Straight Decode

This unit is equipped with various precise decoders;

• Dolby Digital/DTS decoder for multi-channel reproduction of the original sound

• Dolby Digital EX/DTS ES decoder for an additional rear center channel

• Dolby Pro Logic/Pro Logic

/DTS Neo:6 decoder for multi-channel reproduction of 2-channel sources

Select any of the STRAIGHT DECODE modes in Program 10 (except for the sub-program “Enhanced.”) to use any of

these decoders for reproducing the original sound without any sound effects added. In this case, no DSP effect is applied

and the DSP indicator turns off.

DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP)

Features of DSP Programs

The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in

mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments.

No.

Program

CONCERT HALL

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK CONCERT

ENTERTAINMENT

MUSIC VIDEO

TV THEATER

Features

A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect.

Pronounced reflections from all directions emphasize

the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great

deal of presence, and your virtual seat is near the

center, close to the stage.

This program recreates the acoustic environment of a

big church with a high dome and columns along each

side. The reverberation delay is very long while the

early reflections are smaller than with other sound

field programs.

This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom

Line”, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can

seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field

offering a real and vibrant sound.

The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music.

The data for this program was recorded at LA’s

“hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the

center-left of the hall.

This program recreates the acoustic environment of a

lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is

dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized

by a high-energy, “immediate” sound.

Using this program increases the listening position

range. This is a sound field suitable for background

music at parties.

This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video

game sounds.

This program produces an enthusiastic atmosphere

and lets you feel as if you are at an actual jazz or rock

concert.

This program is provided for reproducing monaural

video sources (such as old movies). The program

produces the optimum reverberation to create sound

depth using only the presence sound field.

Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow,

the surround sound field employs the sound

environment of a large concert hall. With this

program, you can enjoy watching various TV

programs such as news, variety shows, music

programs or sports programs.

Type of

sources

For music

sources

For audio-

video

sources

Sub program

—

Disco

6ch Stereo

Game

—

Mono Movie

Variety/Sports

Mode

Hi-Fi DSP

CINEMA DSP

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP)

No.

Program

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

DOLBY DIGITAL

DTS DIGITAL

SUR

PROLOGIC

DOLBY DIGITAL

DTS DIGITAL

SUR

PRO LOGIC

DTS Neo:6

Features

This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a

70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source

sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field

incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source

encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS

(especially large-scale movie productions).

This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound

effects in the latest sound form of science fiction

films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic

space amid the silence. You can enjoy science fiction

films in a virtual-space sound field that includes

Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded

software employing the most advanced techniques.

This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound

design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack

films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the

newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound

field itself are restrained as much as possible.

This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm

and multichannel soundtrack films, and is

characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The

presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially

spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining

the echo effect of conversations without losing

clarity.

This program ideally simulates the multi-surround

speaker systems of the 35-mm film theaters. Dolby

Pro Logic decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or DTS

decoding and digital sound field processing create

precise effects without altering the original sound

orientation.

The surround effects produced by this sound field

wrap around the viewer naturally from the back to the

left and right, and toward the screen.

The built-in decoder precisely reproduces sounds and

sound effects from sources. The highly efficient

decoding process improves crosstalk and channel

separation and makes sound positioning smoother

and more precise.

In this program, no DSP effect is applied.

To reproduce 2 channel sources decoding into

multichannels in each decoding mode.

Type of

sources

For movie

programs

Sub program

Spectacle

Sci-Fi

Adventure

General

Enhanced

Normal

Movie

Music

Cinema

Music

Mode

CINEMA DSP

STRAIGHT DECODE

DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP)

Table of Program Names for Each Input Format

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

DOLBY

DIGITAL

DTS DGTL

SUR

PRO LOGIC

DTS Neo: 6

2 channel

Stereo

70 mm Spectacle

70 mm Sci-Fi

70 mm Adventure

70 mm General

—

Normal

Enhanced

Movie

Music

Cinema

Music

DOLBY DIGITAL

EX decoder:

inactive (off)

DGTL Spectacle

DGTL Sci-Fi

DGTL Adventure

DGTL General

Normal

Enhanced

—

DOLBY DIGITAL

EX decoder:

active (on)

Spectacle EX

Sci-Fi EX

Adventure EX

General EX

Dolby D EX

EX Enhanced

—

DTS ES

decoder:

active (on)

Spectacle ES

Sci-Fi ES

Adventure ES

General ES

—

Matrix

6.1

ES Dscrt 6.1

Enhanced ES

—

DTS ES

decoder:

inactive (off)

DTS Spectacle

DTS Sci-Fi

DTS Adventure

DTS General

—

Normal

Enhanced

—

*1 means the DTS ES Matrix decoder is active.

*2 means the DTS ES Discrete decoder is active.

• If a Dolby Digital signal or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program will be automatically

switched to the Dolby Digital playback sound field or DTS playback sound field.

• If Dolby Digital Surround EX software or DTS ES software is played when AUTO is selected by pressing the EX/ES button on the

remote control, the Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES decoder will automatically turn on and the corresponding DSP program will be

selected.

• EX/ES on the remote control can be used to play Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel sources with rear center speaker. In this case the

program name changes to the corresponding name for 6.1 channel.

• When playing 6.1 channel source with EX/ES on the remote control off, the program name changes to the corresponding name for

5.1 channel.

Note

• The “ ” indicator does not light up when selecting the program No. 10 except for the Enhanced mode.

DOLBY DIGITAL DTSInput

Program

No.

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin

automatic tuning.

Press h to tune in to a higher frequency, or press l

to tune in to a lower frequency. Press the same button

again if the tuning search does not stop at the desired

station.

When tuned in to a station, the “TUNED” indicator

lights up and the frequency of the received station is

shown on the front panel display.

• Use the manual tuning method if the tuning search does not

stop at the desired station because the signal is weak.

■ Manual tuning

If the signal from the station you want to select is weak,

you must tune in to it manually.

1 Select TUNER and the reception band

following steps 1 and 2 described in

“Automatic tuning” on left.

2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off from

the front panel display.

If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display

next to the band indication, press PRESET/TUNING

(EDIT) to turn it off.

3 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune in to

the desired station manually.

Hold down the button to

continue the tuning search.

• Manually tuning in to an FM station will automatically change

the reception mode to monaural to increase the signal quality.

Automatic and Manual Tuning

There are 2 ways of tuning; automatic and manual.

Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are

strong and there is no interference.

■ Automatic tuning

1 Rotate INPUT (or press TUNER on the

remote control) to select TUNER as the input

source.

2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.

“FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display.

3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the

front panel display.

If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display

next to the band indication, press PRESET/TUNING

(EDIT) to turn it off.

INPUT

PRESET/

TUNING

BASS

VOLUME

VIDEO AUXSILENT

PROGRAM

STEREO

SPEAKERS

6CH INPUT MODE

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET

TUNING

PHONES

EFFECT

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

TUNER

STANDBY

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

DSP

TREBLE

–

DIGITAL

FM/AM

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

AUTO

Lights up

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

PHONO

POWER SLEEP

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

AUX

TV/LD VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER CD

Front panel

Remote control

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

AUTO

Goes off

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

PRESET/

TUNING

CR DVD TUNER CDCD R1

CBL

SAT

TAPE

TUNED

AUTO

A~~AM~1440

CR DVD TUNER CDCD R1

CBL

SAT

TAPE

TUNED

AUTO

A~~AM~1440

CR DVD TUNER CDCD R1

CBL

SAT

TAPE

TUNED

A~~AM~1440

TUNING

Presetting Stations

■ Automatically presetting stations

(for FM stations)

You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store

FM stations. This function enables this unit to

automatically tune in to FM stations with strong signals,

and to store up to 40 (8 stations x 5 groups) of those

stations in order. This feature enables you to easily tune in

to any preset station by selecting the preset station

number (see page 41).

1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band.

2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the

front panel display.

3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

for more than 3 seconds.

The preset number, the “MEMORY” and “AUTO”

indicators flash. Then, after about 5 seconds,

automatic preset tuning begins from the frequency

currently displayed toward the higher frequencies.

When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front

panel display shows the frequency of the last preset

station.

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

AUTO

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX 1

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

MEMORY

VOLUME

AUTO

A1:FM~~~~~~~~~

BASS

VOLUME

VIDEO AUXSILENT

PROGRAM

STEREO

SPEAKERS

6CH INPUT MODE

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET

TUNING

PHONES

EFFECT

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

TUNER

STANDBY

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

DSP

TREBLE

–

DIGITAL

Lights up

Notes

• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is

cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.

• When a station data is stored under a preset number, the

frequency and reception band are also stored.

• You can manually replace a preset station with another FM or

AM station by simply following the procedure in the section

“Exchanging Preset Stations” on page 42.

• If the number of the received stations does not reach E8,

automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after

searching all stations.

• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored

automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you

want to store is weak in signal strength, tune in to it manually

in the monaural mode, and store it by following the procedure

in “Manually presetting stations” on page 41.

■ Automatic preset tuning options

You can select the preset number from which this unit

will store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower

frequencies.

1. Repeat steps 1 and 2 in “Automatically presetting

stations” on left.

2. After pressing MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for

about 3 seconds, press A/B/C/D/E, then PRESET/

TUNING l / h to select the preset number under

which the first station will be stored.

Automatic preset tuning will stop when stations have

all been stored up to E8.

3. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon

(:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin

tuning toward lower frequencies.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby

mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC

outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to

power failure. However, if the power is cut for more

than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If

so, store the stations again by using the presetting

station methods.

FM/AM

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

TUNING

■ Manually presetting stations

You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5

groups) manually.

1 Tune in to a station.

See page 39 for tuning instructions.

When tuned in to a station, the front panel display

shows the frequency of received station.

2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).

The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about

5 seconds.

3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset

station group (A to E) while the “MEMORY”

indicator is flashing.

The group letter appears and make sure that the

colon (:) appears on the front panel display next to

the band indication.

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

A/B/C/D/E

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX 1

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

TUNED

MEMORY

VOLUME

C~:AM~~630~kHz

BASS

VOLUME

VIDEO AUXSILENT

PROGRAM

STEREO

SPEAKERS

6CH INPUT MODE

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET

TUNING

PHONES

EFFECT

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

TUNER

STANDBY

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

DSP

TREBLE

–

DIGITAL

43 2,5

Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3.

Flashes

4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a

preset station number (1 to 8) while the

“MEMORY” indicator is flashing.

Press h to select a higher preset station number.

Press l to select a lower preset station number.

5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the

front panel while the “MEMORY” indicator is

flashing.

The station band and frequency appear on the front

panel display with the preset group and number you

have selected.

6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations.

Notes

• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is

cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.

• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with

the station frequency.

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX 1

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

TUNED

VOLUME

A~ AM~~630~kHz

PRESET/

TUNING

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX 1

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

TUNED

MEMORY

VOLUME

C3:AM~ 630~kHz

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX 1

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

TUNED

VOLUME

C3:AM~ 630~kHz

TUNING

Exchanging Preset Stations

You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations

with each other. The example below describes the

procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”.

1 Tune in to preset station “E1” by using the

A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h .

See “Tuning in to a Preset Station” on left.

2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for

more than 3 seconds.

“E1” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the

front panel display.

3 Tune in to preset station “A5” by using the

A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h .

“A5” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the

front panel display.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again.

The stations stored at the two preset assignments are

exchanged.

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

PRESET/

TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX 1

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

TUNED

MEMORY

VOLUME

A5:FM~90.6~MHz

VCR DVD TUNER CDCD RV AUX 1

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

MEMORY

EDIT~ E1-A5

Shows the exchange of stations has

been completed.

BASS

VOLUME

VIDEO AUXSILENT

PROGRAM

STEREO

SPEAKERS

6CH INPUT MODE

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET

TUNING

PHONES

EFFECT

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

TUNER

STANDBY

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

DSP

TREBLE

–

DIGITAL

2,41,31,3

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD R1

CBL

SAT

TAPE

TUNED

MEMORY

E1:FM~87.5 MHz

Tuning in to a Preset Station

You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the

preset station number under which it was stored.

1 Press A/B/C/D/E (A/B/C/D/E on the remote

control) to select the preset station group.

The preset group letter appears on the front panel

display and changes each time you press A/B/C/D/E.

Note

• Make sure that “TUNER” mode is selected if operating using

the remote control.

2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET j / i

on the remote control) to select a preset

station number (1 to 8).

The preset group and number appear on the front

panel display along with the station band, frequency

and the “TUNED” indicator lights up.

BASS

VOLUME

VIDEO AUXSILENT

PROGRAM

STEREO

SPEAKERS

6CH INPUT MODE

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET

TUNING

PHONES

EFFECT

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

TUNER

STANDBY

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

DSP

TREBLE

–

DIGITAL

Front panel

Remote control

Front panel

Remote control

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

LEVEL

STEREO

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

SELECT

EX/ES

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

TEST

ON SCREEN

EFFECT

CHP/INDEX

TV VOL

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHURCH

CHCH

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

TITLE

MUTE

–

3421

910

11 12

67 8

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD R1

CBL

SAT

TAPE

TUNED

E1:FM~87.5 MHz

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

Front panel Remote control

Recording adjustments and other operations are

performed from the recording components. Refer to the

operation instructions for these components.

1 Turn on the power of this unit and all

connected component.

2 Select the source component you want to

record from.

3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station)

on the source component.

4 Start recording on the recording component.

BASIC RECORDING

Notes

• Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.

• When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record

between other components connected to this unit.

• The setting of BASS, TREBLE, BASS EXTENSION,

VOLUME, “3 L/R BALANCE” on the SET MENU and DSP

programs does not affect the recorded material.

• A source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit

cannot be recorded.

• S-video and composite video signals pass independently

through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or

dubbing video signals, if your video source component is

connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite

video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a

composite video) signal by your VCR.

• A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT

channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not

output on VCR 1 OUT.)

• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from

records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material

may infringe copyright laws.

■ Special considerations when

recording DTS software

The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to

digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise

being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to

record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them,

the following considerations and adjustments need to be

made.

For LDs, DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your

player is compatible with the DTS format, follow its

operation instruction to make a setting so that the analog

signal will be output from the player.

■ Timer playback/recording

This unit can perform playback or recording with an

external timer (not supplied). Refer to the operation

instruction for the component and the timer to be used.

Notes

• The stored data such as input source will be reflected in the

playback or recording with the timer.

• If you do not want any sound output during the recording with

a timer, turn the volume down.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

(input source, volume level, set menu settings and so

on) from being lost even if this unit is in the standby

mode (disconnected from the AC outlet). However if

the timer is turned off for more than one week, the

stored data will be lost.

PHONO

AUX

TV/LD VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER CD

INPUT

PHONO

POWER SLEEP

CLEAR

LEARN

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

RE–NAME

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/LD

POWER

REC

POWER

AMP

AVTV

VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD

SELECT

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER CD

BASS

VOLUME

VIDEO AUXSILENT

PROGRAM

STEREO

SPEAKERS

6CH INPUT MODE

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET

TUNING

PHONES

EFFECT

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

TUNER

STANDBY

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

DSP

TREBLE

–

DIGITAL

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

The remote control can operate other A/V components of YAMAHA and other manufacturers as well as this unit. To

control those components, you must set up remote control with the manufacturer codes.

This remote control also has a sophisticated Learn feature. The Learn feature allows it to acquire functions from the

remote controls of other components in your system (or other household appliances) equipped with an infrared remote

control receiver. This feature makes it possible for you to reduce the number of remote control in your entertainment

room.

Notes

• For the operating distance of the remote control and notes about batteries, see pages 3 and 7.

• For the name and function of each part and button, see pages 6 and 7.

Control Area

■ Control area of this unit

The control area of this unit is the shaded area shown

below. To operate this unit, press AMP to select the AMP

mode. Make sure “AMP” is displayed on the remote

control display window.

■ Control area for each component

The component control area is the shaded area shown

below. Each component has different functions for the

operation buttons in the component control area. The

component which has been chosen by pressing an input

selector button or SELECT k/n can be controlled and the

display window shows the corresponding name of the

component to be operated.

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

EX/ES

PHONO

POWER SLEEP

CLEAR

LEARN

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

RE–NAME

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/LD

POWER

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOL

LEVEL

STEREO

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SELECT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

TEST

ON SCREEN

EFFECT

CHP/INDEX

TV VOL

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHURCH

CHCH

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

TITLE

MUTE

POWER

AMP

AVTV

VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD

SELECT

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER CD

–

3421

910

11 12

67 8

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

EX/ES

PHONO

POWER SLEEP

CLEAR

LEARN

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

RE–NAME

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/LD

POWER

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOL

LEVEL

STEREO

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SELECT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

TEST

ON SCREEN

EFFECT

CHP/INDEX

TV VOL

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHURCH

CHCH

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

TITLE

MUTE

POWER

AMP

AVTV

VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD

SELECT

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER CD

–

3421

910

11 12

67 8

POWER

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

LEVEL

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SELECT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

TEST

ON SCREEN

CHP/INDEX

TV VOL

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHURCH

CHCH

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

TITLE

POWER

AVTV

–

3421

910

11 12

67 8

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

EX/ES

button and input selector

buttons switch the control area

for each component.

button is to operate the

other component (not

necessarily connected to this

unit) without changing this

unit’s input source.

Factory setting is YAMAHA LD

player.

Component control area

There are 12 component control areas. You can set up the

manufacturer code and program other remote control functions in

each area. See pages 50 to 54.

SELECT k/n switch the control

area for another component

independently from the input

selected by an input selector

button.

The display window will show

one of the following:

(when pressing n, in the reverse

order when pressing k)

PHONO, TUNER, CD, V-AUX,

CBSAT, MD, CD-R, TV-LD,

VCR 1, VCR 2, DVD.

The buttons in the

dotted lines function

in any mode.

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

3 Press u / d to select the name of your

component’s manufacturer.

You will find the names of most worldwide audio-

video manufacturers in alphabetical order in the

display window.

If you want to change a library (component

category), press j / i. You can set a different

component from the input selector name.

Library choices: L:DVD, L:LD, L:CD, L:CD-R,

L:MD, L:TAP, L:TUN, L:AMP*, L:TV, L:CAB,

L:DBS, L:SAT, L:VCR

(U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only)

*L:AMP (AMP Library)

AMP Library has 2 codes: YPC (code to operate this

unit) and ZONE 2.

4 Press one of the buttons shaded below to

check if it works for the component being

set.

If it does, the manufacturer code setting has been

correctly made. If the manufacturer of your

component has more than one codes, try each of

them until you find the correct one as checking if it

works following step 4.

• If you continuously want to set up another code for another

component, press TV MUTE/SELECT and repeat steps 1, 3

and 4.

Setting the Manufacturer Code

You can control other components by setting a

manufacturer code. A code can be set up in each

component control area.

The following table shows factory-set component

(Library: component category) and the manufacturer code

for each area.

Note

• You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even

if Yamaha manufacture code is initially set as listed above. In

this case, try to set other Yamaha manufacture code(s).

1 Press an input selector button or

select the component you want to set up.

2 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds

by using a ballpoint pen or similar object.

“SETUP” and the selected component name appear

alternately in the display window.

Notes

• Press LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning

process is started.

• If you do not press any button within 30 seconds during step 3,

the setup process is canceled. If this happens, start over from

step 2.

PHONO

AUX

TV/LD VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER CD

LEARN

Input area

PHONO

TUNER

V-AUX

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

D-TV/LD

VCR 1

VCR 2/DVR

DVD

Component category

(Library)

TUNER

VCR

CABLE

CD-R

VCR

DVD

Manufacturer

Yamaha

–

Yamaha

–

Yamaha

–

Yamaha

POWER

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOL

LEVEL

TV VOL

TITLE

MUTE

POWER

AMP

AVTV

–

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

LEARN

5 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup

mode.

Notes

• Supplied remote control does not store all the manufacturer

codes for commercially availabvle AV components (including

Yamaha AV components). Therefore it may not work to operate

your AV component. If operation is not possible with any of

the manfacturer codes, program the new remote control

function with the Learn feature (see page 47) or use the remote

control for the component.

• If you have already programmed a remote control function for

a button, the function by learning programming takes priority

over the setup manufacturer code’s function.

•“ERROR” appears in the display window when pressing

buttons other than indicated in each step, or more than one

button at once.

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

4 Press the button for which you want to

program the new function.

“LEARN” is displayed.

5 Press and hold the button on the other

remote control that has the function you

want to program into this remote control

until “OK” appears in the display window.

Notes

•“NG” appears in the display window when programming has

not been done correctly. In this case, start over from step 4.

• This remote control can learn approximately 120 functions.

However depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may

appear in the display window much earlier than this number. In

this case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make

further learning on the remote control.

6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to program additional

functions.

7 Press LEARN again to exit from the learning

mode.

Notes

• Learning may not be possibe in the following cases:

– when the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other

components are weak

– when the distance between the two remote controls is too

much or too little

– when the remote control infrared windows are not facing at

the appropriate angle

– when the remote control is exposed to the direct sunlight

– when the function to be programmed is continuous or

uncommon

•“ERROR” appears in the display window when pressing

buttons other than indicated in each step.

Learn Feature

If you want to program functions not included in the basic

operations covered by the manufacturer code, or a

manufacturer code is not available, the following

procedure needs to be performed. The possible

programming area is the same as a component control

area, so the buttons are programmable independently for

each source component area.

Note

• This remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote

control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn

most of the other remote control’s functions. However, you

may not be able to program some special signals or extremely

long transmissions. (Refer to the operation instructions for the

other remote control.)

■ Programming a new remote

control function

1 Press an input selector button or

select a source component.

2 Place this remote control and the other

remote control 1 to 4 cm apart on a flat

surface so that their infrared transmitters are

aimed at each other.

3 Press LEARN by using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

Do not press and hold LEARN longer than three

seconds. Otherwise this unit enters the manufacturer

code setting mode.

Notes

• Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Otherwise,

the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case,

press LEARN again.

• Do not press and hold LEARN longer than 3 seconds.

Otherwise this unit enters the manufacturer code setting mode.

PHONO

POWER SLEEP

CLEAR

LEARN

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

RE–NAME

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/LD

POWER

REC

DISC SKIP

AUDIO

VOL

POWER

AMP

AVTV

VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD

SELECT

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER CD

–

1 to 4 cm (approximately 1 inch)

PHONO

POWER SLEEP

CLEAR

LEARN

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

RE–NAME

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/LD

POWER POWER

AMP

AVTV

VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD

SELECT

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER CD

PHONO

POWER SLEEP

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/LD VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER CD

LEARN

Flashes alternately

LEARN

PHONO

POWER SLEEP

CLEAR

LEARN

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

RE–NAME

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/LD

POWER POWER

AMP

AVTV

VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD

SELECT

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER CD

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

■ Clearing a new remote control

function

You can clear the function learned in a certain

programmable button in each area.

1 Press an input selector button or

select the source component you want to do

“One Button Clear”.

The selected component name appears in the display

window.

2 Press LEARN by using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“LEARN” and the selected component name appear

alternately in the display window.

Note

• Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Otherwise

the clearing mode will be canceled. In this case press LEARN

again.

3 Press the button that you want to clear for 3

seconds as pressing CLEAR by using a

ballpoint pen or similar object.

“C:OK” appears in the display window.

Note

• If “NG” appears on the display window, clearing has not been

done correctly. Press and hold CLEAR again, then press the

button to be cleared its programmed function.

• If you continuousuly want to clear another button, press and

hold CLEAR, then press the button to be cleared.

4 Press LEARN again to exit from the learning

mode.

Note

•“ERROR” appears in the display window when pressing

buttons other than indicated in each step.

PHONO

POWER SLEEP

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/LD VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER CD

RE-NAME

LEARN

TRANSMIT

NAME

CLEAR LEARN

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SLEEP

PHONO TUNER CD

AUX

TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD

CBL/SAT

TAPE

PHONO

POWER SLEEP

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/LD VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER CD

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

RE-NAME

Changing the Source Name in the

Display Window

You can change the name that appears in the display

window on the remote control if you want to use the

different name from the original input selector button

names. This is useful when different component is set in

the input selector button.

1 Press an input selector button or

select the source component you want to

rename.

The selected component name appears in the display

window.

2 Press RE-NAME by using

a ballpoint pen or similar

object.

3 Press u / d to select and enter a character.

Pressing d changes the character in the following

order: A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, space, - (hyphen) and /

(slash). (Pressing u goes in the reverse order.)

4 Press j / i to move the cursor to the next

position.

Repeat step 3 and 4 until the new name is completed.

• If you continuously want to rename another source component,

press TV MUTE/SELECT and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4.

5 Press RE-NAME again to exit from the

renaming mode.

Note

•“ERROR” appears in the display window when pressing

buttons other than indicated in each step, or more than one

button at once.

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

CLEAR

Clearing Learned Functions,

Renamed Source Names, and

Setup Manufacturer Codes

You can clear learned functions, renamed source names

and set up manufacture codes. You can also revert the

remote control to the factory setting.

1 Press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

Note

• If you do not press any button within 30 seconds during steps 2

and 3, the clearing process is canceled. If this happen, start over

from step 1.

2 Press u / d to select the clear mode.

The mode is shown in the display window in the

following order:

3 Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3

seconds.

“C:OK” appears in the display window.

Note

•“C:NG” appears in the display window if the operation is

unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2.

4 Press CLEAR to exit from the clearing mode.

Note

•“ERROR” appears in the display window when pressing

buttons other than indicated in each step, or more than one

button at once.

(L: name of a component) Clears

all learned functions for the

component area.

Clears all learned functions for

this unit control area.

Clears all learned functions.

Clears all renamed source names

in the display window.

Clears all programmed functions

including setup manufacturer

codes. This returns to the factory

settings.

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Each Component Control Area

The general operational buttons are shown for each area. Some of them may not function depending on the component

you have. After setting the manufacturer code, press an input selector button or

, or SELECT k / n to select a

component you want to control.

PHONO

POWER SLEEP

CLEAR

LEARN

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

RE–NAME

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/LD

POWER

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOL

LEVEL

STEREO

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SELECT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

TEST

ON SCREEN

EFFECT

CHP/INDEX

TV VOL

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHURCH

CHCH

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

TITLE

MUTE

POWER

AMP

AVTV

VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD

SELECT

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER CD

–

3421

910

11 12

67 8

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

EX/ES

PHONO

POWER SLEEP

CLEAR

LEARN

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

RE–NAME

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/LD

POWER

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOL

LEVEL

STEREO

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SELECT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

TEST

ON SCREEN

EFFECT

CHP/INDEX

TV VOL

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHURCH

CHCH

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

TITLE

MUTE

POWER

AMP

AVTV

VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD

SELECT

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER CD

–

3421

910

11 12

67 8

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

EX/ES

■ Operating a VCR (VCR 1 and VCR

2/DVR areas)

■ Operating a DVD player (DVD

area)

Pause

Skip backward

Search backward

Stop

Title

RETURN

Numeric buttons

DISC SKIP

(DVD changer)

* TV POWER functions to turn on and off your TV

without switching the input if the manufacturer code is

set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer

code for your TV is set up in both D-TV/LD and

PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-

TV/LD area.

Power

AUDIO

Skip forward

Search forward

Up/down, left/

right and SELECT

DISPLAY

Title/index

* TV POWER, TV INPUT, TV volume +/–, and TV

MUTE function to operate your TV without switching

the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD

or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV

is set up in both D-TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority

is given to the signal in the D-TV/LD area.

VCR Channel

up/down

Pause

Record

Play

Search backward

Power

Search forward

Stop

Play

Numeric buttons

Enter

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

PHONO

POWER SLEEP

CLEAR

LEARN

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

RE–NAME

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/LD

POWER

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOL

LEVEL

STEREO

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SELECT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

TEST

ON SCREEN

EFFECT

CHP/INDEX

TV VOL

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHURCH

CHCH

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

TITLE

MUTE

POWER

AMP

AVTV

VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD

SELECT

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER CD

–

3421

910

11 12

67 8

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

EX/ES

PHONO

POWER SLEEP

CLEAR

LEARN

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

RE–NAME

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/LD

POWER

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOL

LEVEL

STEREO

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SELECT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

TEST

ON SCREEN

EFFECT

CHP/INDEX

TV VOL

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHURCH

CHCH

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

TITLE

MUTE

POWER

AMP

AVTV

VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD

SELECT

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER CD

–

3421

910

11 12

67 8

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

EX/ES

■ Operating an LD player (D-TV/LD

area)

■ Operating a TV/digital TV (D-TV/

LD area) or a cable TV/satellite TV

(CBL/SAT area)

Set the manufacture code for your LD player following

the setting procedure described on page 45 because TV is

factory-set for this input selector button.

* TV POWER, TV INPUT, TV channel +/–, TV volume

+/– and TV MUTE function to operate your TV

without switching the input if the manufacturer code is

set in PHONO.

Play

TV MUTE

POWER

(Pause)

(Record)

(Play)

(Search backward)

TV INPUT

Channel up/down

(Power)

(Search forward)

Volume up/down

The buttons in parentheses above (AV POWER, REC, d,

w, e/r, a) function to operate your VCR without

switching the input to VCR 1 if the manufacturer code is

set in VCR 1.

Pause

Skip backward

Search backward

Numeric buttons

Stop

Power

Sound

Skip forward

Search forward

Display

Chapter/time

Numeric buttons

Enter/12

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

PHONO

POWER SLEEP

CLEAR

LEARN

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

RE–NAME

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/LD

POWER

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOL

LEVEL

STEREO

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SELECT

+10

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

TEST

ON SCREEN

EFFECT

CHP/INDEX

TV VOL

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHURCH

CHCH

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

TITLE

MUTE

POWER

AMP

AVTV

VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD

SELECT

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER CD

–

3421

910

11 12

67 8

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

EX/ES

■ Operating a CD player (CD area)

PHONO

POWER SLEEP

CLEAR

LEARN

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

RE–NAME

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/LD

POWER

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOL

LEVEL

STEREO

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SELECT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

TEST

ON SCREEN

EFFECT

CHP/INDEX

TV VOL

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHURCH

CHCH

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

TITLE

MUTE

POWER

AMP

AVTV

VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD

SELECT

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER CD

–

3421

910

11 12

67 8

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

EX/ES

■ Operating a CD recorder (CD-R

area) or an MD recorder (MD/

TAPE area)

* TV POWER, TV INPUT, TV channel +/–, TV volume

+/– and TV MUTE function to operate your TV

without switching the input if the manufacturer code is

set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer

code for your TV is set up in both D-TV/LD and

PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-

TV/LD area.

Numeric buttons

Pause

DISC SKIP

(CD changer)

Skip backward

Search backward

Power

Skip forward

Play

Search forward

Display

Index

Record (MD

recorder only)

Skip backward

Search backward

Numeric buttons

* TV POWER, TV INPUT, TV channel +/–, TV volume

+/– and TV MUTE function to operate your TV

without switching the input if the manufacturer code is

set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer

code for your TV is set up in both D-TV/LD and

PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-

TV/LD area.

Power

Pause

Skip forward

Play

Stop

Search forward

Display

Index

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

PHONO

POWER SLEEP

CLEAR

LEARN

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

RE–NAME

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/LD

POWER

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOL

LEVEL

STEREO

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SELECT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

TEST

ON SCREEN

EFFECT

CHP/INDEX

TV VOL

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHURCH

CHCH

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

TITLE

MUTE

POWER

AMP

AVTV

VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD

SELECT

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER CD

–

3421

910

11 12

67 8

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

EX/ES

■ Operating a tuner (TUNER area)■ Operating a tape deck (MD/TAPE

area)

PHONO

POWER SLEEP

CLEAR

LEARN

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

RE–NAME

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/LD

POWER

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOL

LEVEL

STEREO

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SELECT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

TEST

ON SCREEN

EFFECT

CHP/INDEX

TV VOL

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHURCH

CHCH

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

TITLE

MUTE

POWER

AMP

AVTV

VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD

SELECT

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER CD

–

3421

910

11 12

67 8

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

EX/ES

* TV POWER, TV INPUT, TV channel +/–, TV volume

+/– and TV MUTE function to operate your TV

without switching the input if the manufacturer code is

set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer

code for your TV is set up in both D-TV/LD and

PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-

TV/LD area.

Pause

Record

Direction A

Search backward

Power

A/B

Direction B

Play

Stop

* TV POWER functions to turn on and off your TV

without switching the input if the manufacturer code is

set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer

code for your TV is set up in both D-TV/LD and

PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-

TV/LD area.

Preset down

Preset up

Power

A/B/C/D/E

Preset stations

Search forward

Numeric buttons

Index

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

PHONO

POWER SLEEP

CLEAR

LEARN

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

RE–NAME

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/LD

POWER

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOL

LEVEL

STEREO

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SELECT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

TEST

ON SCREEN

EFFECT

CHP/INDEX

TV VOL

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHURCH

CHCH

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

TITLE

MUTE

POWER

AMP

AVTV

VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD

SELECT

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER CD

–

3421

910

11 12

67 8

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

EX/ES

■ Operating the component set in

This button is not an input selector button but simply

provides the space for an extra component (not

necessarily connected to this unit) to control with this

unit’s remote control without changing this unit’s input

source. The white area shown below can be used for the

component set in

and the function for each button

differs depending on the component.

YAMAHA LD player is factory-set in

. However if

you want to set other component, set the manufacturer

code for the component you want to set in the

button

following the manufacturer code setting procedure

described on page 45.

TV POWER functions to

turn on and off your TV

without switching the

input if the manufacturer

code is set in D-TV/LD

or PHONO. When the

manufacturer code for

your TV is set up in both

D-TV/LD and PHONO

areas, priority is given to

the signal in the D-TV/

LD area.

The functions of these

buttons in the component

control area differ for the

component you set in

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

Adjusting the Items on the SET

Adjustment should be made with the remote control.

Adjustment procedures are explained using SET MENU 2

LOW FRQ TEST as an example.

1 Press AMP to select the

AMP mode.

AMP appears in the display

window on the remote control.

2 Press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU.

3 Press u/d repeatedly to select the item (1 to

15) you want to adjust.

• By pressing SET MENU repeatedly, you can select items in the

same order as when pressing d.

Note

• If u is pressed when SET MENU 1 is selected, and if d is

pressed when SET MENU 15 is selected, SET MENU will be

closed. Press SET MENU to open SET MENU again.

AMP

SET MENU

ADVANCED OPERATION

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOL

LEVEL

STEREO

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SELECT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

TEST

ON SCREEN

EFFECT

CHP/INDEX

TV VOL

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHURCH

CHCH

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

TITLE

MUTE

–

3421

910

11 12

67 8

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

EX/ES

PHONO

POWER SLEEP

CLEAR

LEARN

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

RE–NAME

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/LD

POWER

REC

POWER

AMP

AVTV

VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD

SELECT

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER CD

4,5

3,6

The SET MENU consists of 15 items including the

speaker mode setting, center graphic equalizer and

parameter initialization features. Choose the appropriate

item and adjust or select the values as necessary.

• You can adjust the items on the SET MENU while playing a

source.

• We recommend that you adjust the items on the SET MENU

while using a video monitor. It is easier to see the video

monitor than it is to see the front panel display on this unit

while adjusting the items.

Note

• The indication on the front panel display is the abbreviation of

the OSD.

1 SPEAKER SET

1A CENTER SP

1B MAIN SP

1C REAR L/R SP

1D REAR CT SP

1E LFE/BASS OUT

1F MAIN LEVEL

1G SP B SET

2 LOW FRQ TEST

3 L/R BALANCE

4 HP TONE CTRL

5 CENTER GEQ

6 INPUT RENAME

7 I/O ASSIGNMENT

7A CMPNT-V INPUT

7B OPTICAL OUT

7C OPTICAL IN

7D COAXIAL IN

8 INPUT MODE

9 PARAM. INI

10 LFE LEVEL

11 D-RANGE

12 SP DELAY

13 DISPLAY SET

14 MEMORY GUARD

15 6CH INPUT SET

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

SET MENU 1/4

2 LOW FRQ TEST

3 L/R BALANCE

4 HP TONE CTRL

/ : Up/Down

-/+ : Enter

≥ 1 SPEAKER SET

SET MENU 1/4

≥ 2 LOW FRQ TEST

3 L/R BALANCE

4 HP TONE CTRL

/ : Up/Down

-/+ : Enter

1 SPEAKER SET

SET MENU

LRG SML NONE

1A CENTER SP

Depending on the item, press u/d to select a sub

item.

5 Press j / i repeatedly to change the setting

of the item.

6 Press u/d repeatedly until the menu

disappears or simply press one of the DSP

program group button to exit from the SET

MENU.

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

2 LOW FRQ TEST

≥ OUTPUT…MAIN L/R

FRQ……………………88Hz

TEST TONE………OFF

2 LOW FRQ TEST

OUTPUT…MAIN L/R

FRQ……………………88Hz

≥ TEST TONE…………ON

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

LRG SML NONE

1A CENTER SP

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

LRG SML NONE

1A CENTER SP

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

EX/ES

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SELECT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

3421

910

11 12

67 8

1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode

settings)

Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your

speaker configuration.

Notes

• When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit,

level adjustments in items 1B,1E and 1F are possible, but those

in items 1A,1C and 1D are not affected.

• When 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source, level

adjustments in items 1A through 1E are not affected.

• Select SML if the woofer diameter of you speaker is smaller

than 16 cm. If it is larger than 16 cm, select LRG.

■ 1A CENTER SP (center speaker

mode)

By adding a center speaker to your speaker configuration,

this unit can provide good dialog localization for many

listeners and superior synchronization of sound and

images. The OSD shows a large, small or no center

speaker depending on how you set this item.

Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE

Initial setting: LRG

LRG

Select this if you have a large center speaker. The entire

range of the center channel signal is directed to the center

speaker.

SML

Select this if you have a small center speaker. The low-

frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center

channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E

LFE/BASS OUT”.

NONE

Select this if you do not have a center speaker. All of the

center channel signal are directed to the left and right

main speakers.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is in the standby

mode. However if the power cord is disconnected from

the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than

one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the

items again.

4 Press j / i once to enter the setup mode of

the selected item.

The last setting you adjusted appears on the video

monitor or on the front panel display.

2 LOW FRQ TEST

OUTPUT…MAIN L/R

FRQ……………………88Hz

≥ TEST TONE………OFF

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SET MENU

LARGE SMALL

1B MAIN SP

LRG SML NONE

1C REAR L/R SP

LRG SML NONE

1C REAR L/R SP

LRG SML NONE

1C REAR L/R SP

LARGE SMALL

1B MAIN SP

■ 1B MAIN SP (main speaker mode)

The OSD shows large or small main speakers depending

on how you set this item.

Choices: LARGE, SMALL

Initial setting: LARGE

LARGE

Select this if you have large main speakers. The entire

range of the left and right main channel signal is directed

to the left and right main speakers.

SMALL

Select this if you have small main speakers. The low-

frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel

are directed to the speakers selected with “1E LFE/BASS

OUT”.

Note

• When you select MAIN for “1E LFE/BASS OUT”, the low-

frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are

directed to the main speakers even if you select SMALL for the

main speaker mode.

■ 1C REAR L/R SP (rear speaker

mode)

The OSD shows large, small or no rear speakers

depending on how you set this item.

Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE

Initial setting: LRG

LRG

Select this if you have large left and right rear speakers or

if a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The

entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the

left and right rear speakers.

SML

Select this if you have small left and right rear speakers.

The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear

channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E

LFE/BASS OUT”.

NONE

Select this if you do not have rear speakers.

Note

• If “1C REAR L/R SP” is set to NONE, “1D REAR CT SP”

will be skipped.

• This unit is set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode by selecting

NONE for “1C REAR L/R SP” (see page 32).

SET MENU

■ 1D REAR CT SP (rear center

speaker mode)

By adding a rear center speaker to your speaker

configuration, this unit can provide more realistic front-

to-back and transitions. The initial setting is “LRG”.

Note

• If “1C REAR L/R SP” is set to NONE, “1D REAR CT SP”

will be skipped.

Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE

Initial setting: LRG

LRG

Select this if you have a large rear center speaker. The

entire range of the rear center channel signal is directed to

the rear center speaker.

SML

Select this if you have a small rear center speaker. The

low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear

center channel are directed to the speakers selected with

“1E LFE/BASS OUT”.

NONE

Select this if you do not have a rear center speaker. All of

the rear center channel signal are directed to the left and

right rear speakers.

■ 1E LFE/BASS OUT (bass out

mode)

LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit

decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency

signals are defined as 90 Hz and below. The Low-

frequency signals are directed to both main right and left

speakers, and the subwoofer (subwoofer can be used for

both stereo reproduction and the DSP program).

Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH

Initial setting: BOTH

SWFR

Select this if you use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are

directed to the subwoofer.

MAIN

Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The LFE signals

are directed to the main speakers.

BOTH

Select this if you use a subwoofer and you want to mix

the main channel low-frequency signals with the LFE

signals. LFE signals for the main L/R speakers are output

from both L/R speakers and subwoofer.

Note

• The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) from all main,

center, rear and rear center channels are directed to the LFE

channel when you select the small speaker setting in items 1A,

1B, 1C and 1D.

SWFR MAIN BOTH

1E LFE/BASS OUT

SWFR MAIN BOTH

1E LFE/BASS OUT

SWFR MAIN BOTH

1E LFE/BASS OUT

LRG SML NONE

1D REAR CT SP

LRG SML NONE

1D REAR CT SP

LRG SML NONE

1D REAR CT SP

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SET MENU

Normal -10dB

1F MAIN LEVEL

Normal -10dB

1F MAIN LEVEL

2 LOW FRQ TEST

Use this feature to adjust the output level of the

subwoofer so it matches that of the other speakers in your

configuration. Change the setting with the remote control

while sitting in the listening position.

1 Press j / i to set “TEST TONE” to ON, and

adjust the volume with VOL +/– so you can

hear the tone.

Notes

• Do not turn up the volume too high.

• If no test tone is heard, turn down the volume, set this unit in

the standby mode and make sure all the necessary connections

are correct.

2 Press d to go to “OUTPUT” and press j / i

to select the speaker you want to compare

with the subwoofer.

If SWFR is selected, the test tone above 90 Hz will

not be output from the subwoofer. The test tone will

not necessarily be output from the selected speakers.

The output mode of the test tone depends on the

settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” on the SET MENU.

■ 1F MAIN LEVEL (main level

mode)

Change this setting if you cannot match the output level

of the center, rear (L/R) and rear center speakers with the

main speakers because of the unusually high-efficiency

performance of the main speakers.

Choices: Normal, –10 dB

Initial setting: Normal

Normal

Select this if you can match the output level of your effect

speakers with that of your main speakers when using the

test tone.

–10 dB

Select this if you cannot match the output level of your

effect speakers with that of your main speakers when

using the test tone.

2 LOW FRQ TEST

OUTPUT…MAIN L/R

FRQ……………………88Hz

≥ TEST TONE…………ON

2 LOW FRQ TEST

≥ OUTPUT…MAIN L/R

FRQ……………………88Hz

TEST TONE………OFF

■ 1G SP B SET (speaker B set)

Use this feature to select the location of the main speakers

to be connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.

Choices: MAIN, ZONE B

Initial setting: MAIN

MAIN

Select this to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B when the

speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set

in the main room.

1G SP B SET

-/+ : Select

/ : Exit

“MAIN ZONE B

ZONE B

Select this if the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B

terminals are set in the second room. If SPEAKERS A is

turned OFF and SPEAKERS B is turned ON, all the

effect speakers in the main room are muted and the sound

is output only from SPEAKERS B. When a DSP program

is selected, this unit automatically enters the Virtual

CINEMA DSP mode. If the headphones are connected to

PHONES jack on this unit in the Virtual CINEMA DSP

mode, this unit enters the SILENT CINEMA DSP mode

and the sound is output from both headphones and

SPEAKERS B.

1G SP B SET

-/+ : Select

/ : Exit

MAIN “ZONE B

SET MENU

5 CENTER GEQ

≥ 300Hz

1kHz

3kHz

10kHz

+3dB

100Hz

4 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone

control)

Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble

when you use your headphones.

Control range (dB): –6 to +3 for both BASS and TRBL

(treble)

Initial setting: 0 dB for both BASS and TRBL (treble)

5 CENTER GEQ (center graphic

equalizer)

Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-band graphic

equalizer so that the center speaker tonal quality matches

that of the left and right main speakers. You can select the

100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, or 10 kHz frequencies.

Control range (dB): –6 to +6

Initial setting: 0 dB for 5-band

1 Press d to select a higher frequency and u

to select a lower frequency.

2 Press j / i to adjust the level of that

frequency.

• You can monitor the center speaker sound while adjusting this

item by using the test tone. Press TEST before starting the

foregoing procedure. “TEST DOLBY SUR.” appears on the

video monitor, and the test tone starts alternating among the

speakers. Once you begin this procedure, the test tone remains

at the center speaker and you can hear how the sound changes

as you adjust the various frequency levels. To stop the test tone,

press TEST (see pages 25 and 26).

3 L/R BALANCE

-/+ : Adjust

/ : Exit

…………………… ……………………

4 HP TONE CTRL

TRBL

0dB

≥BASS

5 CENTER GEQ

300Hz

1kHz

3kHz

10kHz

0dB

≥ 100Hz

3 Press d to go to “FRQ” and press j / i to

select the frequency you want to use.

4 Adjust the volume of the subwoofer with the

controls on the subwoofer so it matches that

of the speaker you are comparing it to.

■ About the test tone

The test tone is produced by the tone generator.

The tone generator produces a narrow-band noise

centered on a specified frequency by the band pass filter

besides a wide-band noise.

You can change this center frequency from 35 Hz through

250 Hz in one-sixth octave steps.

You can use the test tone not only for adjusting the

subwoofer level, but also for checking the low-frequency

characteristics of your listening room. Low-frequency

sounds are especially affected by the listener’s position,

speaker placement, subwoofer polarity and other

conditions.

3 L/R BALANCE (balance of the

left and right main speakers)

Use this feature to adjust the balance of the output level

from the left and right main speakers.

Control range: 10 steps for L/R

Initial setting: 0 dB for L/R

Press i to decrease the output level for the

left main speaker. Press j for the right main

speaker.

2 LOW FRQ TEST

OUTPUT…MAIN L/R

≥ FRQ……………………88Hz

TEST TONE………OFF

Digital generator

(wide band noise produced)

Band pass filter

35 Hz – 250 HzCenter freq.

Freq.

Noise

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SET MENU

6 INPUT RENAME

Use this feature to change the name of the input which

appears on the OSD or the front panel display.

1 Press an input selector button (or use

INPUT) to select the input you want to

change the name of.

2 Press AMP to select the

AMP mode.

3 Press j / i to place the _ (under-bar) under

the space or the character you want to edit.

4 Press u/d to select the character you want

to use and j / i to move to the next one.

• Press d to change the character in the following

order, or press u to go in the reverse order.

A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, #,

*, +, and so on.

• Follow the foregoing procedure to rename other

inputs.

Note

• You can use up to 8 characters to rename the inputs.

5 Press i repeatedly to exit from INPUT

RENAME.

6 INPUT RENAME

-/+ : Position

/ : Character

DVD ≥ DVD

6 INPUT RENAME

-/+ : Position

/ : Character

DVD ≥ DVD1

6 INPUT RENAME

-/+ : Position

/ : Character

DVD ≥ DVD

7B OPTICAL OUT

(2)…………… CD-R

≥ (1)……………MD/TAPE

7 I/O ASSIGNMENT

It is possible to assign jacks according to the component

to be used if this unit’s COMPONENT VIDEO input jack

or DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jack settings (component

names for jacks) differ from that component. This makes

it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively

connect more component.

Once you assign, you can select that component with

INPUT (or the input selector buttons on the remote

control).

■ 7A CMPNT-V INPUT for

COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT jacks

[A] and [B]

Choices: [A] DVD, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1,

CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD

[B] CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, V-AUX,

VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1

Initial settings: [A] DVD

[B] CBL/SAT

■ 7B OPTICAL OUT for OPTICAL

OUTPUT jacks (1) and (2)

Choices: (1) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO,

V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/

SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD

(2) CD-R, CD, PHONO, V-AUX, VCR 2/

DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD,

DVD, MD/TAPE

Initial settings: (1) MD/TAPE

(2) CD-R

7A CMPNT-V INPUT

[B]……………CBL/SAT

≥ [A]…………… DVD

AMP

SET MENU

8 INPUT MODE (initial input

mode)

Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources

connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn

on this unit (see page 29 for details about the input

mode).

Choices: AUTO, LAST

Initial setting: AUTO

AUTO

Select this to allow this unit to automatically detect the

type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode.

LAST

Select this to set this unit to automatically select the last

input mode used for that source.

■ 7C OPTICAL IN for OPTICAL

INPUT jacks (3) to (6)

Choices: (3) CD, PHONO, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1,

CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/

TAPE, CD-R

(4) CD-R, CD, PHONO, VCR 2/DVR,

VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD,

MD/TAPE

(5) DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD,

PHONO, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/

SAT, D-TV/LD

(6) CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/

TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, VCR 2/

DVR, VCR 1

Initial settings: (3) CD

(4) CD-R

(5) DVD

(6) CBL/SAT

■ 7D COAXIAL IN for COAXIAL

INPUT jacks (7) and (8)

Choices: (7) CD, PHONO, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR,

VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD,

MD/TAPE, CD-R

(8) D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R,

CD, PHONO, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR,

VCR 1, CBL/SAT

Initial settings: (7) CD

(8) D-TV/LD

Note

• You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of

jack.

7D COAXIAL IN

≥ (8)………D-TV/LD

(7)……… CD

8 INPUT MODE

-/+ : Select

/ : Exit

AUTO LAST

7C OPTICAL IN

(4)…………… CD-R

≥ (5)…………… DVD

(6)……………CBL/SAT

(3)…………… CD

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SET MENU

11 D-RANGE (dynamic range)

Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range. This setting

is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital

signals.

Choices: MAX, STD, MIN

Initial setting: MAX (for both speakers and headphones)

MAX

Select the “MAX” setting for feature films.

STD

Select the “STD” (Standard) setting for general use.

MIN

Select the “MIN” setting for listening to sources at

extremely low volume levels.

11 D-RANGE

HP: MAX STD MIN

≥ SP: MAX STD MIN

9 PARAM. INI (parameter

initialization)

Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each DSP

program within a DSP program group. When you

initialize a DSP program group, all of the parameter

values within that group revert to their initial settings.

Press the corresponding numeric button for

the DSP program that you want to initialize.

The asterisk (*) next to the program number means

that the parameter values have been changed.

Notes

• You cannot initialize the individual DSP programs within a

group separately.

• The parameter values of the DSP programs do not change if

you initialize a program group that does not have the asterisk

mark (*).

• When “14 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON (see page 65),

you cannot initialize any program groups.

• Once you initialize a DSP program group, you cannot

automatically revert to the previous parameter settings.

10 LFE LEVEL

This setting is effective only when this unit decodes

Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE

(low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a

Dolby Digital or DTS signal. The LFE signal carries the

low-frequency special effect sound which is only added to

certain scenes.

Control range (dB): –20 to 0 for both SPEAKER and

HEADPHONE

Initial setting: 0 dB for both SPEAKER and

HEADPHONE

1 Press d/u to select the item to be adjusted.

2 Press j / i to adjust the LFE level.

Note

• Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your

subwoofer or headphones.

9 PARAM. INI

* 5 678

9 *10

Press No. Key

1 23*4

10 LFE LEVEL

HEADPHONE…………0dB

≥ SPEAKER………………0dB

10 LFE LEVEL

HEADPHONE…………0dB

≥ SPEAKER…………-11dB

SET MENU

12 SP DELAY

Use this feature to adjust the delay of the Center and the

Rear Center channel sounds. This feature works when

there is sound output from the center speakers with a

source like Dolby Digital or DTS, etc. Ideally, the Center

speaker and the Rear Center speaker should be the same

distance from the main listening position as the left and

right Main speakers. However, in most home situations,

the Center speaker or the Rear Center speaker is placed in

line with the Main speakers or the Rear speakers. By

delaying the sound from the Center speaker and the Rear

Center speaker, the apparent distance from the Center

speaker and the Rear Center speaker to the main listening

position can be adjusted to make it seem the same as the

distance between the left and right Main speaker, and the

left and right Rear speakers to the listening position.

Adjusting the delay time for the Center speaker is

especially important for giving depth to the dialogue.

1 Press u/d to select “UNIT”.

2 Press j / i to select the unit to be used for

setting.

Select one from “msec”, “meters”, and “feet”.

Notes

• Setting items change depending on the unit chosen.

• When “meters” or “feet” is selected, enter the distance from

your listening position to each speaker.

3 Press u/d to select the speaker for which

the delay is adjusted.

4 Press j / i to set the delay.

Press i for higher value and j for lower value.

Center speaker image

■ Setting by “msec”

Control range: 0 to 5.0 ms (for center), 0 to 30.0 ms

(for rear center)

Initial settings: 0 ms (for center), 3.0 ms (for rear

center)

■ Setting by “meters”

Control range: 0.15 to 30.00 m (for main L/R,

center, rear L/R, rear center)

Initial settings: 3.00 m (for main L/R, center, rear L/

R), 2.10 m (for rear center)

■ Setting by “feet”

Control range: 0.5 to 100 ft (for main L/R, center,

rear L/R, rear center)

Initial settings: 10.0 ft (for main L/R, center, rear L/

R), 7.0 ft (for rear center)

Note

• No delay will be set if the same distance is set for the main L/R

and center, or the rear L/R and rear center with “meters” or

“feet” selected.

12 SP DELAY

CENTER……………0.0ms

REAR CT…………3.0ms

≥ UNIT……………………msec

12 SP DELAY

MAIN L/R………3.00m

CENTER……………3.00m

REAR L/R………3.00m

≥ UNIT………………meters

REAR CT…………2.10m

12 SP DELAY

MAIN L/R……10.0ft

CENTER…………10.0ft

REAR L/R……10.0ft

≥ UNIT……………………feet

REAR CT…………7.0ft

12 SP DELAY

CENTER……………0.0ms

REAR CT…………3.0ms

≥ UNIT……………………msec

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SET MENU

13 DISPLAY SET

■ DIMMER

You can adjust the brightness of the front panel display.

Control range: –4 to 0

Initial setting: 0

■ OSD SHIFT (OSD off-set position)

This setting is used to adjust the vertical position of the

OSD.

Control range: +5 (downward) to –5 (upward)

Initial setting: 0

Press i to lower the position of the OSD.

Press j to raise the position of the OSD.

■ GRAY BACK

Selecting AUTO for the on-screen display setting displays

a gray background when there’s no video signal input.

Nothing is displayed on the screen including the on-

screen display if OFF is selected.

Choices: AUTO, OFF

Initial setting: AUTO

14 MEMORY GUARD

Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP

program parameter values and other settings on this unit.

Choices: ON, OFF

Initial setting: OFF

Select ON to protect the following features:

• DSP program parameters

• All SET MENU items

• Center, rear speakers, rear center, and subwoofer levels

• The on-screen display (OSD) mode

Notes

• When “14 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot use

the test tone.

• When “14 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot select

any other SET MENU items.

14 MEMORY GUARD

-/+ : Select

/ : Exit

OFF ON

13 DISPLAY SET

OSD SHIFT………………0

≥ DIMMER………………………0

GRAY BACK………AUTO

15 6CH INPUT SET

Use this feature to set the direction of the signals input

into the center and subwoofer channels when the source

component is connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks.

■ 15A CENTER to (direction of the

center channel signals)

This item sets the direction of the signals input into the

CENTER jack.

Choices: CENTER, MAIN

Initial setting: CENTER

CENTER

The input signals are output from the center speaker.

MAIN

The input signals are directed to the main L/R speakers

with same level.

■ 15B SWFR to (direction of the

signals input into the subwoofer)

This item sets the direction of the signals input into the

SUBWOOFER jack.

Choices: SWFR, MAIN

Initial setting: SWFR

SWFR

The input signals are output from the subwoofer.

MAIN

The input signals are directed to the main L/R speakers

with same level.

CENTER MAIN

15A CENTER to

SWFR MAIN

15B SWFR to

You can adjust the output level of each effect speaker

(center, left and right rear and subwoofer) while listening

to a music source.

Adjustment should be made with the remote control.

1 Press AMP to select the

AMP mode.

2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the

speaker(s) you want to adjust.

Each time you press LEVEL, the selected speaker

changes and appears on the front panel display and

on the video monitor as follows: center, right rear,

rear center, left rear and subwoofer.

TV INPUT

LEVEL

TITLE

AMP

PHONO

POWER SLEEP

CLEAR

LEARN

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

RE–NAME

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/LD

POWER

REC

POWER

AMP

AVTV

VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD

SELECT

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER CD

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOL

LEVEL

STEREO

TEST

ON SCREEN

EFFECT

TV VOL

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

TITLE

MUTE

–

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS

• Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker(s) to

be adjusted by pressing d / u.

Center speaker output level

Subwoofer output level

Left rear speaker output

level

Rear center speaker output

level

Right rear speaker output

level

3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level.

• The control range for the center or left and right

rear speakers is from +10 dB to –10 dB.

• The control range for the subwoofer is from 0 dB

to –20 dB.

Notes

• When the speaker output modes for “1A CENTER SP” and

“1C REAR L/R SP” are set to NONE, and “1E LFE/BASS

OUT” to MAIN, the output level of those speakers cannot be

adjusted because there is no sound coming from these speakers.

• When you adjust the output level with LEVEL, the settings you

made with the test tone will be changed.

• It is recommended to adjust the speakers (except for a

subwoofer) by following the steps described in Using the Test

Tone on pages 25 and 26.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is in the standby

mode. However if the power cord is disconnected from

the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than

one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, set the

output level again.

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the

standby mode after the amount of time you have set. The

sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while

this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer

also automatically turns off the external components

connected to AC OUTLET(S).

The sleep timer can only be set with the remote control.

• By connecting a commercially available timer to this unit, you

can also set a wake-up timer. Refer to the operation instructions

of the timer.

Setting the Sleep Timer

1 Select a source and start playback on the

source component.

2 Press SLEEP repeatedly

to set the amount of time.

Each time you press SLEEP,

the front panel display changes

as shown below. The SLEEP

indicator flashes while

switching the amount of time

for sleep timer.

The “SLEEP” indicator soon lights up on the front

panel display after the sleep timer has been set.

The display then returns to the previous indication.

SLEEP

PHONO

POWER SLEEP

CLEAR

LEARN

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

RE–NAME

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/LD

POWER POWER

AMP

AVTV

VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD

SELECT

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER CD

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX

DSP

DIGITAL

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

VOLUME

SLEEP

SLEEP 120min

SLEEP TIMER

Canceling the Sleep Timer

Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF”

appears on the front panel display.

After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, the

“SLEEP” indicator goes off and the display returns

to the previous indication.

• The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by setting this unit

in the standby mode by using STANDBY on the remote control

(or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) or by disconnecting the

AC power cord from the AC outlet.

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX

DSP

DIGITAL

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

VOLUME

SLEEP

CONCERT HALL

ZONE 2 (For U.S.A., Canada and Australia models)

You can make up a multi-room audio system with this unit. You can enjoy an audio source selected with INPUT l / h

(or input selector buttons) in the second room (Zone 2).

Only analog signals are sent to the second room. For any source you want to listen to in the second room, you must

connect the analog output jack from the source to the corresponding analog input jack on this unit.

To use the multi-room functions of this unit, you need the following additional equipment:

• An infrared signal receiver in the second room

• An infrared emitter in the main room

This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second room to the main room

(for example, to a CD player or LD player).

• An amplifier and speakers for the second room

• Since there are so many ways to connect and use this unit in a

multi-room installation, we recommend that you consult with

the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for

the Zone 2 connections which will best meet your

requirements.

• Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the

REMOTE CONTROL OUT jack of this unit. If you own these

products, you may not need to use an infrared emitter. Up to 6

YAMAHA components can be connected as shown.

■ Example of a system configuration and connections

REMOTE CONTROL OUT

CD INPUT

REMOTE CONTROL IN

ZONE 2 AUDIO OUT

OUT

REMOTE

CONTROL OUT

Main room

Infrared signal

receiver

Remote control

Second room

Amplifier

Infrared emitter

This unit

CD player

(or other component)

This unit

Notes

• When not using the main room, turn down the volume of this unit in the main room. Adjust the Zone 2 volume with the control on

the amplifier in the second room.

• DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature for CDs encoded with DTS to avoid unexpected noise.

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

ZONE 2

■ Special considerations when

using DTS software

The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Therefore, if you

attempt to send the DTS signal to the second room, you

will only be able to hear the digital noise sound that could

damage your speakers.

Due to this characteristic of DTS encoded discs, the

following considerations and adjustments need to be

made.

For LDs or DVDs encoded with DTS

Only 2-channel analog audio signals may be sent to the

second room, as follows:

• LDs

Set your LD player’s left and right outputs to the

analog soundtrack.

• DVDs

Use the disc menu to set the DVD player’s mixed 2-

channel left and right audio outputs to the PCM or

Dolby Digital soundtrack.

For CDs encoded with DTS

DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature for CDs encoded with

DTS to avoid unexpected noise.

Remote Control in Zone 2

In the second room (Zone 2), the supplied remote control

can be used for the Zone 2 remote control. You can select

the input source and control the component which is

located in the main room directly from the second room

regardless of the listening condition in the main room.

1 Repeat steps 1 and 2 of the procedure in

“Setting the Manufacturer Code” on page 45.

2 Press j / i to select “L:AMP”.

3 Press u / d to select “Zone2”.

4 Press LEARN to complete the Zone 2 setup.

5 Press SELECT k to display “ZONE2” in the

display window.

6 Press an input selector button to select the

input source you want to watch or listen to

in the second room.

The display window shows “2: name of selected

input” if the remote control is in the Zone 2 mode.

Note

• The SYSTEM POWER, STANDBY and MUTE button on the

remote control works for the second room. However Zone 2

volume cannot be adjusted with the remote control. Use the

control on the amplifier in the second room.

7 You can control the component by using the

component control area buttons.

8 Press SELECT k / n to exit from the Zone 2

mode.

POWER POWER

SELECT

POWER POWER

SELECT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

EX/ES

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOL

LEVEL

STEREO

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SELECT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

TEST

ON SCREEN

EFFECT

CHP/INDEX

TV VOL

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHURCH

CHCH

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

TITLE

MUTE

–

3421

910

11 12

67 8

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

LEARN

PHONO

AUX

TV/LD VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER CD

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING

What is a Sound Field?

What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument

are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In

addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections

enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size

and shape of the room in which we are sitting.

■ Elements of a sound field

In any environment, in addition to the direct sound

coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument,

there are two distinct types of sound reflections that

combine to make up the sound field:

Early reflections

Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly

(50 ms – 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting

from one surface only — for example, from the ceiling or

a wall. Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct

sound.

Reverberations

These are caused by reflections from more than one

surface — walls, ceiling, the back of the room — so

numerous that they merge together to form a continuous

sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen

the clarity of the direct sound.

Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent

reverberation taken together help us to determine the

subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this

information that the digital sound field processor

reproduces in order to create sound fields.

If you could create the appropriate early reflections and

subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you

would be able to create your own listening environment.

The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of

a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at

all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly

what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field

processor.

Sound Field Program Parameters

DSP programs consist of some parameters to determine

the apparent room size, reverberation time, distance from

you to the performer, etc. In each program, these

parameters are set with values precisely calculated by

YAMAHA to create a sound field unique to the program.

It is recommended to use DSP programs without

changing the values of parameters; however, this unit also

allows you to create your own sound fields. Starting with

one of the built-in programs, you can adjust those

parameters.

Each DSP program has a set of parameters that allow you

to change the characteristics of the acoustic environment

to precisely create the effect you want. These parameters

correspond to the many natural acoustic factors that create

the sound field you experience in an actual concert hall or

other listening environment. The size of the room, for

example, affects the length of time between the early

reflections. The “ROOM SIZE” parameter provided in

many of the DSP programs alters the timing between

these reflections, thus changing the shape of the “room”

you are listening. In addition to room size, the shape of

the room and the characteristics of its surfaces have a

significant effect on the final sound. Surfaces that absorb

sound, for example, cause the reflections and

reverberations to die out more quickly, while highly

reflective surfaces allow the reflections to carry on for a

longer period of time. The digital sound field parameters

allow you to control these and many other factors that

contribute to your personal sound field, allowing you to

essentially “redesign” the concert halls, theaters, etc.

provided to create custom-tailored listening environments

that ideally match your mood and music.

See “DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER

DESCRIPTIONS” on pages 72 to 75.

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITINGSOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING

4 Press u / d to select the

parameter.

5 Press j / i to change the

parameter value.

• When you set the parameter to a value other than the factory-

set value, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the parameter name

on the video monitor.

6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 above as necessary to

change other program parameters.

Notes

• The available parameters may be displayed on more than one

OSD page for some of the programs. To scroll through pages,

press u / d.

• You cannot change parameter values when “14 MEMORY

GUARD” on the SET MENU is set to ON. If you want to

change the parameter values, set “14 MEMORY GUARD” to

OFF (see page 65).

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby

mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC

outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to

power failure. However, if the power is cut for more

than one week, the parameter value you edited will

return to the factory setting. If so, edit the parameter

value again.

Resetting a Parameter to the

Factory-set Value

■ To reset some of the parameters

to the factory-set values

Select the parameter you want to reset. Then press and

hold j / i until the value temporarily stops at the factory-

set value. The asterisk mark (*) by the parameter name

disappears on the video monitor.

■ To reset all of the parameters to

the factory-set values

Use “9 PARAM. INI” on the SET MENU to reset all of

the parameter values of all DSP programs within the

selected group to the factory-set values (see page 63).

This operation resets all of the parameter values of all

DSP programs within that group to the factory-set values.

Changing Parameter Settings

You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory-set

parameters. Although you do not have to change the

initial settings, you can change some of the parameters to

better suit the input source or your listening room.

Adjustments should be made with the remote control.

• We recommended that you edit the parameter while using a

video monitor. It is easier to see the video monitor than it is to

see the front panel display.

1 Press AMP to select the

AMP mode.

AMP appears in the display

window on the remote control.

2 Turn on the video monitor

and press ON SCREEN

repeatedly to select the

full display mode.

3 Select a DSP program you want to adjust.

AMP

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

P04 ROCK CONCERT

INIT.DLY…………15ms

ROOM SIZE…………1.0

LIVENESS…………………5

REV.TIME…………1.6s

REV.DELAY……120ms

≥ DSP LEVEL…………0dB

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

SELECT

EX/ES

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

3421

910

11 12

67 8

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

Program No.

Example of the parameter setting display

Parameters

Cursor

Program name

PHONO

POWER SLEEP

CLEAR

LEARN

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

RE–NAME

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/LD

POWER

REC

POWER

AMP

AVTV

VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD

SELECT

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER CD

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOL

LEVEL

STEREO

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SELECT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

TEST

ON SCREEN

EFFECT

CHP/INDEX

TV VOL

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHURCH

CHCH

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

TITLE

MUTE

–

3421

910

11 12

67 8

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

EX/ES

Parameter valves

Large value = 2.0Small value = 0.1

Sound Source

TimeTimeTime

Early

Reflections

Source Sound

Level

■ ROOM SIZE

[P. ROOM SIZE for the presence sound field] Control Range 0.1 – 2.0

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the

surround sound field becomes.

Description: As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between

the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the

reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from

one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room.

Large value = 99 msSmall value = 1 ms

Reflection Face

Sound Source

TimeTime Time

INIT.DLYINIT.DLYINIT.DLY

Early

Reflections

Source Sound

Level

DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your

listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.

■ DSP LEVEL Control Range –6dB – +3 dB

Function: This parameter adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range.

Description: Depending on the acoustics of you listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect

level relative to the direct sound.

■ INIT. DLY (Initial Delay)

[P. INT. DLY for the presence sound field] Control Range 1 – 99 msec

Function: This parameter changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the

direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener.

Description: The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther

the apparent distance seems. For a small room, this parameter would be set to a small value, and for a

large room, it would be set to a large value.

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITINGDIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

■ S. DELAY (Surround Delay) Control Range 0 – 49 msec (The range

depends on the signal format.)

Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the surround sound.

■ S. INIT. DLY (Surround Initial Delay) Control Range 1 – 49 msec

Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side

of the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two rear

channels are used.

■ S. ROOM SIZE (Surround Room Size) Control Range 0.1 – 2.0

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field.

■ S. LIVENESS (Surround Liveness) Control Range 0 –10

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field.

■ RC. INIT. DLY (Rear Center Initial Delay) Control Range 1 – 49 msec

Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the rear center

sound field.

■ RC. ROOM SIZE (Rear Center Room Size) Control Range 0.1 – 2.0

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the rear center sound field.

■ RC. LIVENESS (Rear Center Liveness) Control Range 0 – 10

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the rear center sound field.

Large value = 10Small value = 0

Large

Reflected Sound

Small Reflected

Sound

Sound Source

Live

TimeTimeTime

Dead

Source Sound

Level

■ LIVENESS Control Range 0 – 10

Function: This parameter adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the

early reflections decay.

Description: The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall

surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces

is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. The

LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the

room.

DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

60 dB 60 dB 60 dB

(dB)

60 dB

Level

Time

REV. LEVEL

Source Sound

■ REV. LEVEL (Reverberation Level) Control Range 0 – 100 %

Function: This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound.

Description: The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes.

Time

REV. TIMEREV.

DELAY

Reverberation

Source Sound

Level

■ REV. DELAY (Reverberation Delay) Control Range 0 – 250 msec

Function: This parameter adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning

of the reverberation sound.

Description: The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you

feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment.

Large value = 5.0 sSmall value = 1.0 s

Long

Reverberation

Short

Reverberation

Sound Source

REV. TIMEREV. TIMEREV. TIME

Early Reflections

ReverberationSource SoundReverberation

■ REV. TIME (Reverberation Time) Control Range 1.0 – 5.0 sec

Function: This parameter adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to

decay by 60 dB (at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an

extremely wide range.

Description: Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments, and a shorter time

for “live” sources and listening room environments.

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITINGDIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

For 6ch Stereo

■ CT LEVEL (Center Level) Control Range 0 – 100 %

Function: These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode.

■ RL LEVEL (Rear Left Level) Control Range 0 – 100 %

Function: These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode.

■ RR LEVEL (Rear Right Level) Control Range 0 – 100 %

Function: These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode.

■ RC LEVEL (Rear Center Level) Control Range 0 – 100 %

Function: These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode.

For PRO LOGIC Music

■ PANORAMA Control Range OFF/ON

Function: Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for wraparound effect.

■ DIMENSION Control Range –3 – STD – +3

Function: Gradually adjusts the soundfield either towards the front or towards the rear.

■ CT WIDTH (Center Width) Control Range 0 – 7

Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees.

For DTS Neo: 6 Music

■ C. IMAGE (Center Image) Control Range 0 – 0.5

Function: This parameter adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed

below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact

the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.

■ General

Problem

This unit fails to turn

on when STANDBY/

ON (or SYSTEM

POWER) is pressed,

or enters in the

standby mode soon

after the power has

been turned on.

On-screen display

does not appear.

No sound and/or no

picture.

Cause

The power cord is not connected or the

plug is not completely inserted.

The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

on the rear panel is not fully set to the

left or right position.

The protection circuitry has been

activated.

This unit has been exposed to a strong

external electric shock (such as lightning

and strong static electricity).

The setting for the on-screen display is

set to “DISPLAY OFF”.

The GRAY BACK setting under “13

DISPLAY SET” on the SET MENU is

set to OFF, and no video signal is input

to this unit.

Incorrect input or output cable

connections.

An appropriate input source has not been

selected.

The speaker connections are not secure.

The main speakers to be used have not

been selected properly.

The volume is turned down.

The sound is muted.

The signals that this unit cannot

reproduce such as a CD-ROM are being

input.

The output and input for the picture are

connected to different types of video

jacks.

Remedy

Firmly connect the power cord.

Set the switch fully to the left or right position when this unit is in

the standby mode.

Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all

speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not

touch anything other than its respective connection.

Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, plug

it back in after 30 seconds, and start operating.

Select the full display or short display mode (see page 23).

Set GRAY BACK to AUTO to always show the OSD (see page

65).

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables

may be defective.

Select an appropriate input source with INPUT or 6CH (INPUT)

(or the input selector buttons) (see page 27).

Secure the connections (see page 11).

Select the main speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or B (see page

27).

Turn up the volume.

Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a

mute and adjust the volume (see page 28).

Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce.

Make connections using the same type of jack (between

S VIDEO, VIDEO (composite), or COMPONENT VIDEO jacks)

for both the input and output.

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem

The sound suddenly

goes off.

Only the speaker on

one side can be

heard.

No sound from the

effect speakers.

No sound from the

center speaker.

No sound from the

rear speakers.

No sound from the

rear center speaker.

No sound from the

subwoofer.

Cause

The protection circuit has been activated

because of a short circuit, etc.

The sleep timer has functioned.

The sound is muted.

Incorrect cable connections.

Incorrect setting of “3 L/R BALANCE”

on the SET MENU.

The sound effect is off.

The source encoded with a Dolby Digital

or DTS signal does not have a center,

rear L/R or rear center channel signals.

A 96-kHz sampling digital signal is

being input to this unit.

The output level of the center speaker is

set to minimum.

“1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is

set to NONE.

One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 5

except for Game and 6ch Stereo) has

been selected.

The output level of the rear speakers is

set to minimum.

“1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET MENU

is set to NONE.

A monaural source is being played with

the program 10.

“1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET MENU

is set to NONE.

“1D REAR CT SP” on the SET MENU

is set to NONE.

“1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET

MENU is set to MAIN when a Dolby

Digital or DTS signal is being played.

“1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET

MENU is set to SWFR or MAIN when a

2-channel source is being played.

The source does not contain low bass

signals (90 Hz and below).

Remedy

Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch is set to the

appropriate position and then turn this unit back on.

Check the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn

this unit back on.

Turn on the power, and play the source again.

Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a

mute and adjust the volume (see page 28).

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables

may be defective.

Adjust it to the appropriate position.

Press STEREO/EFFECT to turn it on (see page 33).

Raise the level of the center speaker (see pages 25, 26).

Select the appropriate mode for your center speaker (see page

56).

Select another DSP program.

Raise the output level of the rear speakers (see pages 25, 26).

Select the appropriate speaker mode for the rear L/R speakers

(see page 57).

Select another DSP program.

If the speaker mode for the rear L/R speakers is set to NONE, the

speaker mode for the rear center speaker is automatically set to

NONE. Select the appropriate speaker mode for the rear L/R

speaker mode (see page 57).

Select LRG or SML (see page 58).

Select SWFR or BOTH (see page 58).

Select BOTH (see page 58).

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem

Dolby Digital or DTS

sources cannot be

played. (Dolby Digital or

DTS indicator on the

front panel display

does not light up.)

Poor bass

reproduction.

A “humming” sound

can be heard.

The volume level is low

while playing a record.

The volume level

cannot be increased, or

the sound is distorted.

The sound effect

cannot be recorded.

A source cannot be

recorded.

The sound field

parameters and some

other settings on this

unit cannot be

changed.

This unit does not

operate properly.

“CHECK SP WIRES”

appears on the front

panel display.

Cause

“Digital output” and “Dolby Digital” or

“DTS” are not selected on the connected

components.

“1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET

MENU is set to SWFR or BOTH and

your system does not include a

subwoofer.

The output mode for each speaker (main,

center, rear, or rear center) on the SET

MENU does not match your speaker

configuration.

Incorrect cable connections.

No connection from the turntable to the

GND terminal.

The record is being played on a turntable

with an MC cartridge.

The component connected to the

OUT(REC) jacks of this unit is turned

off.

It is not possible to record the sound

effect by a recording component.

A source component is connected to the

analog input jacks of this unit for digital

recording.

Digital connections are not made between

this unit and other components for

playback or recording.

A source component is connected to the

digital input jacks of this unit for analog

recording.

Analog connections are not made

between this unit and other components

for playback or recording.

Some recording components cannot

record the Dolby Digital or DTS sources.

“14 MEMORY GUARD” on the SET

MENU is set to ON.

The internal microcomputer has been

frozen by an external electric shock (such

as lightning or excessive static electricity)

or by a power supply with low voltage.

Speaker cables are short circuited.

Remedy

Make an appropriate setting following the operation

instructions for your component.

Select MAIN (see page 58).

Select the appropriate output mode for each speaker based on

the size of the speakers in your configuration (see pages 56 to

58).

Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the

cables may be defective.

Connect the grounding cord of your turntable to the GND

terminal of this unit (see page 18).

The turntable should be connected to this unit through an

MC-head amplifier (see page 17).

Turn on the power to the component.

Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks.

Make digital connections.

Connect a source component to the analog input jacks.

Make analog connections.

Select OFF (see page 65).

Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and then plug

it in again after about 30 seconds.

Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

TROUBLESHOOTING

■ Tuner

Previously preset

stations can no longer

be tuned in.

FM stereo reception is

noisy.

There is distortion, and

clear reception cannot

be obtained even with a

good FM antenna.

The desired station

cannot be tuned in with

the automatic tuning

method.

The desired station

cannot be tuned in with

the automatic tuning

method.

There are continuous

crackling and hissing

noises.

There are buzzing and

whining noises

(especially in the

evening).

Problem

FM/

Cause

This unit has been disconnected for a

long period.

The characteristics of FM stereo

broadcasts may cause this problem

when the transmitter is too far away or

the antenna input is poor.

There is multipath interference.

The station is too weak.

The signal is weak or the antenna

connections are loose.

Noises result from lightning,

fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats

and other electrical equipment.

A TV set is being used nearby.

Remedy

Re-store the stations.

Check the antenna connections.

Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna.

Use the manual tuning method.

Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multipath

interference.

Use the manual tuning method.

Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.

Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for

best reception.

Use the manual tuning method.

Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help

somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise.

Move this unit away from the TV.

Problem

The sound is degraded

when listening with

headphones connected

to a tape deck or CD

player that is connected

to this unit.

There is noise

interference from digital

or high-frequency

equipment, or this unit.

This unit suddenly

turns into the standby

mode.

Cause

This unit is in the standby mode.

This unit is too close to the digital or high-

frequency equipment.

The internal temperature becomes too high

and the overheat protection circuitry has

been activated.

Remedy

Turn on the power of this unit.

Move this unit further away from such equipment.

Wait until this unit cools down and then turn it back on.

TROUBLESHOOTING

■ Remote control

Problem

The remote control

does not work nor

function properly.

The remote control

does not “learn” new

functions.

Cause

Wrong distance or angle.

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an

inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is

striking the remote control sensor of this

unit.

The batteries are weak.

The manufacturer code has not been

correctly set.

Even if the maufacturer code is correctly

set, there are some models that do not

respond to the remote control.

The batteries of this remote control and/

or the other remote control are too weak.

The distance between the two remote

controls is too much or too little.

The signal coding or modulation of the

other remote control is not compatible

with this remote control.

Memory capacity is full.

Remedy

The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6

m (20 feet) and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the

front panel (see page 7).

Reposition this unit.

Replace the batteries.

Set the manufacturer code correctly (see page 45).

Try to set the other codes of the same maufacturer (see page

45).

Program the necessary functions independently into the

programmable buttons on this unit‘s remote control using the

Learn feature.

Replace the batteries (see page 3).

Place the remote controls at the proper distance (see page 47).

Learning is not possible.

Further learning is not possible without deleting unnecessary

functions (see page 47).

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

GLOSSARY

■ Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround uses a four analog channel recording

system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects:

two left and right main channels (stereo), a center channel

for dialog (monaural), and a rear channel for special

sound effects (monaural). The rear channel reproduces

sound within a narrow frequency range.

Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes

and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as

well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit

employs a digital signal processing system that

automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to

enhance moving sound effects and directionality.

■ Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that

gives you completely independent multi-channel audio.

With three front channels (left, center and right), and two

rear stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides five full-

range audio channels. With an additional channel

especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency

effect), the system has a total of 5.1 channels (LFE is

counted as 0.1 channel).

Using two-channel stereo for the rear speakers, more

accurate moving sound effects and surround sound

environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The

wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum

volume) reproduced by the five full-range channels and

the precise sound orientation generated using digital

sound processing provide listeners with previously

unheard of excitement and realism.

With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up

to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for

your enjoyment.

■ Dolby Digital Surround EX

This unit is equipped with the Dolby Digital decoder that

can reproduce 5.1-channel sources adding a rear center

channel. (The sound to be output from a rear center

speaker is created by mixing the content of rear L/R

channels.) This decoder is the most suitable to reproduce

the soundtrack for the movies recorded by Dolby Digital

Surround EX. You can enjoy dynamic and realistic sounds

by adding another channel.

■ Dolby Pro Logic

Dolby Pro Logic is the improved technique to decode

vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround programs. This

new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback

with two left and right main channels, a center channel,

and two left and right rear channels compared with one

limited rear channel for the conventional Pro Logic

technology. Also the music mode is available for 2-

channel sources in addition to the movie mode.

■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems)

Digital Surround

DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog

soundtracks of movies with a six-channel digital sound

track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie

theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.

has developed a home theater system so that you can

enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial

representation of DTS digital surround in your home.

This system is practically distortion-free, clear 6-channel

sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, two

rear channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer,

for a total of 5.1 channels).

■ Neo: 6

Neo: 6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6

channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables

playback with the full-range channels with higher

separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two

modes are available; “Music mode” for playing music

sources and “Cinema mode” for movies.

■ LFE 0.1 channel

This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.

The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.

This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a

low frequency range compared to the full-range

reproduced by the other 5 channels in a Dolby Digital or

DTS 5.1 channel systems.

■ CINEMA DSP

DIGITAL

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were

originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect

is best felt in a theater having many speakers and

designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions,

such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and

so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are

differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth

of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses

YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine

Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to

provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater

in the listening room of your own home.

■ SILENT CINEMA

YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect

DSP algorithm for headphones.

Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound

field so that accurate representations of all the sound field

programs can be enjoyed on headphones.

GLOSSARY

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP

YAMAHA has developed a virtual CINEMA DSP

algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field

surround effects even without any rear speakers by using

virtual rear speakers.

It is even possible to enjoy virtual CINEMA DSP in a

minimum two-speaker system that does not include a

center speaker.

■ S VIDEO signal

With S VIDEO signal system, the video signal normally

transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted

as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the

chrominance through the S VIDEO cable. Using the S

VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and

allows recording and playback of even more beautiful

images.

■ Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal

is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the

and P

signals for the chrominance. Color can

be reproduced more faithfully with this system because

each of these signals is independent. The component

signal is also called the “color difference signal” because

the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal.

A monitor with component input jacks is required in

order to use the component signal for output.

■ PCM (Linear PCM)

Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog

audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without

using any compression. This is used as a method of

recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a

technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per

very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code

modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and

then modulated for recording.

■ Sampling frequency and number

of quantized bits

When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of

times the signal is sampled per second is called the

sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when

converting the sound level into a numeric value is called

the number of quantized bits.

The range of rates that can be played back is determined

based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range

representing the sound level difference is determined by

the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the

sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies

that can be played back, and the higher the number of

quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be

reproduced.

■ I/O assignment (SET MENU)

Although component is normally connected according to

jack names shown on the rear panel, this unit includes a

function that assigns jacks according to the component

being connected. If the component being used differs

from the component name shown for this unit’s

component video input jacks or digital input/output jacks,

it is possible to assign jacks according to the component

being connected. This makes it possible to change the

jack assignment and effectively connect more component.

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SPECIFICATIONS

AUDIO SECTION

• Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω ..................................... 100 W

• Maximum Power (EIAJ)

[China model]

1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ......................................................... 150 W

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 140/170/205/245 W

• Damping Factor

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................... 80 or more

• Frequency Response

CD to Main L/R ...................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω, Main L/R ................................ 0.04%

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

PHONO MM to REC OUT (5 mV, shorted)

[U.S.A., Canada and China models] ................................. 86 dB

[Australia model] ............................................................... 81 dB

CD (250 mV, shorted) to Main L/R, Effect Off .................. 100 dB

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Main L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less

• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)

CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Main L/R ........................ 60 dB/45 dB

• Tone Control (Main L/R)

BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz

TREBLE Boost/Cut ............................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz

BASS EXTENSION .................................................. +6 dB/60 Hz

• Phones Output ........................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω

• Input Sensitivity

CD, etc .................................................................... 150 mV/47 kΩ

PHONO ................................................................... 2.5 mV/47 kΩ

6CH INPUT ............................................................ 150 mV/47 kΩ

• Output Level

REC OUT .............................................................. 150 mV/1.2 kΩ

PRE OUT .................................................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ

SUBWOOFER .......................................................... 4.0 V/1.2 kΩ

VIDEO SECTION

• Video Signal Type ...................................................... NTSC or PAL

• Composite Video Signal Level ...................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω

• S-Video Signal Level

Y ................................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω

C .......................................................................... 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω

• Component Video Signal Level

Y ................................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω

, P

............................................................. 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω

• Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................................... 50 dB

• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)

Composite, S-Video ................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB

Component ................................................. DC to 60 MHz, –3 dB

FM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[Australia and China models] ....................... 87.50 to 108.00 MHz

• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.)

Mono/Stereo ........................ 2.0 µV (17.3 dBf) /25 µV (39.2 dBf)

• Selectivity (400 kHz) ............................................................... 70 dB

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo ................................................................. 0.2%/0.3%

• Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 45 dB

• Frequency Response ........................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz +0.5, –2 dB

AM SECTION

• Tuning Range ......................................... 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz

• Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m

GENERAL

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................... AC 120 V/60 Hz

[Australia model] ................................................. AC 240 V/50 Hz

[China model] ...................................................... AC 220 V/50 Hz

• Power Consumption

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................. 400 W/500 VA

[Australia and China models] .............................................. 410 W

Standby Mode .............................................................. 1 W or less

• AC Outlets

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................. 2 (Total 80 W maximum)

[China model] ........................................ 2 (Total 50 W maximum)

[Australia model] .......................................... 1 (100 W maximum)

• Dimension (W x H x D)

................... 435 x 171 x 434 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 17-1/16”)

• Weight ......................................................................... 15 kg (33 lbs)

• Accessories ...................................................................... See page 3

*Specifications are subject to change without notice.

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

Printed in Malaysia V958320-2

OWNER’S MANUAL

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of this unit in the

space below.

MODEL:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.

Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future

reference.

AV Receiver

HTR-5590

Documenttranscriptie

U HTR-5590 AV Receiver YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA OWNER’S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia V958320-2 IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 10 CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated. Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions should be followed. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning. Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water – for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like. Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer. A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn. I CAUTION 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to. Power Sources – This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product. Lightning – For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges. Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged, b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product, c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water, IMPORTANT SAFETY SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS INSTRUCTIONS d) 20 21 22 23 If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation, e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance - this indicates a need for service. Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. Heat – The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE FCC INFORMATION (for US customers) 1. 2. 3. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. CAUTION II CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place — away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical storm. Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 18 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (For China model only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 220/240 V AC, 50 Hz. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. III CAUTION Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. INTRODUCTION CONTENTS CONTENTS ............................................................ 1 FEATURES ............................................................. 2 GETTING STARTED ............................................ 3 Checking the Package Contents ................................ 3 Installing Batteries in the Remote Control ................ 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4 PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP ............................................... 10 CONNECTIONS .................................................. 14 Before Connecting Components ............................. 14 Connecting Video Components ............................... 14 Connecting Audio Components .............................. 17 Connecting the Antennas ......................................... 19 Connecting to a Subwoofer ..................................... 20 Connecting to the 6CH INPUT Jacks ..................... 20 Connecting the Power Supply Cords ....................... 21 Turning on the Power .............................................. 22 OSD Modes ............................................................. 23 Selecting the OSD Mode ......................................... 23 SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS .......................... 24 Summary of SPEAKER SET Items 1A through 1G ... 24 ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS ............................................................ 25 SET MENU ........................................................... 55 Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU .................. 55 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) ............ 56 2 LOW FRQ TEST ................................................ 59 3 L/R BALANCE (balance of the left and right main speakers) ..................................................... 60 4 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) ........ 60 5 CENTER GEQ (center graphic equalizer) .......... 60 6 INPUT RENAME ............................................... 61 7 I/O ASSIGNMENT ............................................. 61 8 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) .................... 62 9 PARAM. INI (parameter initialization) .............. 63 10LFE LEVEL ........................................................ 63 11D-RANGE (dynamic range) ............................... 63 12SP DELAY .......................................................... 64 13DISPLAY SET .................................................... 65 14MEMORY GUARD ............................................ 65 156CH INPUT SET ................................................ 65 ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS ....................................................... 66 SLEEP TIMER ..................................................... 67 ADVANCED OPERATION ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD) .......................... 23 Control Area ............................................................ 44 Setting the Manufacturer Code ............................... 45 Learn Feature ........................................................... 47 Changing the Source Name in the Display Window ............................................................... 48 Clearing Learned Functions, Renamed Source Names, and Setup Manufacturer Codes .............. 49 Each Component Control Area ............................... 50 BASIC OPERATION Speakers to Be Used ................................................ 10 Speaker Placement .................................................. 10 Connecting the Speakers ......................................... 11 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ................... 44 PREPARATION Front Panel ................................................................ 4 Remote Control ......................................................... 6 Using the Remote Control ......................................... 7 Front Panel Display ................................................... 8 Rear Panel ................................................................. 9 ADVANCED OPERATION INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION Setting the Sleep Timer ........................................... 67 Canceling the Sleep Timer ...................................... 67 ZONE 2 (For U.S.A., Canada and Australia models) .............................................................. 68 Remote Control in Zone 2 ....................................... 69 Before You Begin .................................................... 25 Using the Test Tone (TEST DOLBY SUR.) ........... 25 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION BASIC OPERATION BASIC PLAYBACK ............................................. 27 Input Modes and Indications ................................... 29 Selecting a Sound Field Program ............................ 30 Selecting PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC or Neo: 6 ... 31 DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP) ................................................................. 34 Understanding Sound Fields ................................... 34 Hi-Fi DSP Programs ................................................ 34 CINEMA-DSP ........................................................ 34 Straight Decode ....................................................... 35 Sound Field Effect ................................................... 35 Features of DSP Programs ...................................... 36 Table of Program Names for Each Input Format .... 38 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING .......................................................... 70 What is a Sound Field? ............................................ 70 Sound Field Program Parameters ............................ 70 Changing Parameter Settings .................................. 71 Resetting a Parameter to the Factory-set Value ....... 71 DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS .............................................. 72 TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................... 76 GLOSSARY .......................................................... 81 SPECIFICATIONS .............................................. 83 TUNING ................................................................ 39 English Automatic and Manual Tuning ................................ 39 Presetting Stations ................................................... 40 Tuning in to a Preset Station ................................... 42 Exchanging Preset Stations ..................................... 42 BASIC RECORDING .......................................... 43 1 FEATURES Built-in 6-Channel Power Amplifier Other Features ◆ Minimum RMS Output Power (0.04% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8Ω) Main: 100 W + 100 W Center: 100 W Rear: 100 W + 100 W Rear center: 100 W ◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A Converter ◆ “SET MENU” which Provides You with 15 Items for Optimizing This Unit for Your Audio/Video System ◆ Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker Balance Adjustment ◆ 6-Channel External Decoder Input for Other Future Formats ◆ BASS EXTENSION Button for Reinforcing Bass Response ◆ On Screen Display Function Helpful in Controlling This Unit ◆ S Video Signal Input/Output Capability ◆ Component Video Input/Output Capability ◆ Video Conversion (S Video → Composite Video) ◆ Optical and Coaxial Digital Audio Signal Jacks ◆ Sleep Timer ◆ Remote Control with Preset Manufacturer Codes and “Learning” Capability ◆ PROCESSOR DIRECT for no alteration of the original signal ◆ Custom Installation Facility (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) Multi-Mode Digital Sound Field Processing ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic Decoder ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX Decoder ◆ DTS/DTS ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo: 6 Decoder ◆ CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP Technology and Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital or DTS ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA DSP Sophisticated AM/FM Tuner ◆ 40-Station Random Access Preset Tuning ◆ Automatic Preset Tuning ◆ Preset Station Shifting Capability (Preset Editing) • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses in this manual. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part for the purpose of the improvement in operativity and others. In this case the product has priority. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. 2 “DTS”, “DTS-ES Extended Surround” and “Neo: 6” are trademarks of Digital Theater System, Inc. GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Checking the Package Contents Check your package to make sure it has the following items. Batteries (4) (AAA, R03, UM-4) Remote control TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR AM loop antenna LEARN SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP 6CH INPUT PHONO TUNER CD CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD PREPARATION A V-AUX SELECT POWER POWER TV AMP AV REC AUDIO DISC SKIP + VOL Indoor FM antenna (For U.S.A., Canada and China models) – LEVEL TITLE SET MENU + TV VOL TV INPUT CH – MUTE MENU A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE SELECT PRESET (For Australia model) CH + PRESET ON SCREEN TV VOL – DISPLAY HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB BASIC OPERAIONT TEST RETURN STEREO EFFECT ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER MOVIE THEATER 1 5 6 7 8 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 /DTS SUR. SELECT EX/ES 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX ■ Notes on batteries 2 3 ■ Changing batteries As the batteries lose power, the operating range of the remote control decreases and the indicator does not flash or its light becomes dim. When you notice any of these conditions, change all of the batteries. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1 • Change the batteries periodically. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. ADVANCED OPERATION Installing Batteries in the Remote Control Notes Press the part and slide the battery compartment cover off. 2 Insert four supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM4) according to the polarity markings on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place. 3 English • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. APPENDIX 1 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front Panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 VOLUME NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER D I G I T A L STANDBY /ON 6CH INPUT MODE A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE BASS TREBLE TUNER SPEAKERS A B PROCESSOR BASS DIRECT EXTENSION MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO EDIT PHONES STEREO S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL PROGRAM DSP EFFECT SILENT VIDEO AUX PRESET /TUNING EDIT 8 9 0 q w e r ty u – FM/AM MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM i + – + TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L MONO op a s 1 STANDBY/ON 6 Front panel display Turns on and sets this unit in the standby mode. When you turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. Shows information about the operational status of this unit. Standby mode In this mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power to receive infrared-signals from the remote control. 2 6CH (INPUT) Selects the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. The source selected by pressing 6CH (INPUT) takes priority over the source selected with INPUT (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). 7 VOLUME Controls the output level of all audio channels. This does not affect the REC OUT level. 8 SPEAKERS A/B Turn on or off the set of main speakers connected to the A and/or B terminals on the rear panel at each time its corresponding button is pressed. 9 BASS EXTENSION Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch. Turns on or off the BASS EXTENSION function at each time the button is pressed, this feature boosts the bass frequency of the left and right main channels by +6 dB (60 Hz) while maintaining overall tonal balance. This boost is useful if you do not use a subwoofer. 4 (INPUT) MODE 0 PROCESSOR DIRECT Sets the priority for the types of input signals (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) to receive when one component is connected to two or more input jacks of this unit (see page 29). Priority cannot be set when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source. Turns on or off the PROCESSOR DIRECT function at each time the button is pressed. When this is on, BASS, TREBLE, and BASS EXTENSION are bypassed, eliminating any alteration of the original signal. 3 INPUT selector 5 Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote control. 4 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS q STEREO/EFFECT w A/B/C/D/E Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E). e PROGRAM l / h Selects the DSP program. Selects preset station number 1 to 8 when the colon (:) appears next to the band indication on the front panel display, and selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) does not appear. t PHONES jack Outputs audio signals for private listening with headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals are output to the OUTPUT jacks or to the speakers. (There is an exception depending on the “1G SP B SET” setting on the SET MENU.) y VIDEO AUX jacks s TREBLE Adjusts the high-frequency response for the left and right main channels. Turn the control to the right to increase or to the left to decrease the high-frequency response. Note • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the lowfrequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the center and rear speakers may not match that of the left and right main speakers. ■ Opening and closing the front panel door When you want to use the controls behind the front panel door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of the panel. When you are not using them, close the door. u PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h (the colon (:) turns on or off) between selecting a preset station number and tuning. This button is also used to exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. NAT URA L SOU ND AV REC EIVE R HTR -59 90 ADVANCED OPERATION Inputs audio and video signals from a portable external source such as a game console. To reproduce source signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input source. a BASS Adjusts the low-frequency response for the left and right main channels. Turn the control to the right to increase or to the left to decrease the low-frequency response. PREPARATION r PRESET/TUNING l / h p TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) Switches the tuning mode between automatic and manual. To select the automatic tuning mode, press this button so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel display. To select the manual tuning mode, press this button so that the “AUTO” indicator does not light up. INTRODUCTION Switches the normal stereo or DSP effect reproduction. When STEREO is selected, 2-channel input signals are directed to the main left and right speakers without effect sounds. All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals except for the LFE channel are mixed down to the main left and right speakers. D I G I T A L ADDITIONAL INFORMATION i FM/AM Switches the reception band between FM and AM. o MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Stores a station in the memory. Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning. To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel. APPENDIX English 5 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote Control This section describes the controls and their functions of the remote control to operate this unit. Functions written in yellow are to operate this unit. Make sure that the AMP mode is selected before operating this unit. The functions written in green and white vary depending on the input source selected. 1 2 3 POWER STANDBY SLEEP 6CH INPUT r t y u A PHONO TUNER CD i V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM 4 5 6 3 STANDBY Sets this unit in the standby mode. 4 SYSTEM POWER Turns on the power of this unit. 5 A Sets the remote control to operate other components (not necessarily connected to this unit) without changing this unit’s input source (see page 54). 6 Input selector buttons Select the input source and change the control area (see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on pages 44 to 54). 7 Display window Shows the selected source component that you are controlling. 8 TV POWER Turns on and off the power of the TV. 7 8 SELECT POWER POWER TV AV AMP o p a s 0 LEVEL (TITLE) Selects the effect speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the level. d q Cursor buttons u / d / j / i Selects and adjusts DSP program parameters and SET MENU items. TV MUTE/SELECT button mutes your TV volume and selects menu items of your DVD player when their manufacture codes are set. REC 9 AUDIO DISC SKIP + VOL – LEVEL 0 TITLE SET MENU + TV VOL A/B/C/D/E TV INPUT q f CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + g PRESET TEST w MUTE MENU ON SCREEN TV VOL RETURN – DISPLAY HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB STEREO h EFFECT e ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER MOVIE THEATER 1 5 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 6 /DTS SUR. 7 8 SELECT EX/ES 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX 9 Operation Section Provides functions such as play, stop, skip, etc. for operating your other components. w TEST (RETURN) Outputs the test tone to adjust the speaker levels. e DSP program (Numeric) buttons Select DSP programs. r RE-NAME Used for changing the input source name in the display window (see page 48). t CLEAR Used for clearing functions acquired when using the learn and rename features, and set manufacturer codes (see pages 48, 49). 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate (see “Using the Remote Control” on page 7). 2 TRANSMIT indicator Flashes while the remote control is sending signals. 6 y LEARN Used for setting up the manufacturer code or for programming the functions of other remote controls (see pages 45-47). u SLEEP Sets the sleep timer. i 6CH INPUT Selects the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Using the Remote Control p AV POWER Turns on and off the power of the component selected by the input selector button. INTRODUCTION o SELECT k/n Selects the another component to control independently from the input that has been selected by pressing an input selector button. VOLUME NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER D I G I T A L STANDBY /ON 6CH INPUT MODE A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING STEREO PROGRAM PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE BASS TREBLE TUNER SPEAKERS A B PROCESSOR BASS DIRECT EXTENSION MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO EDIT PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL DSP a AMP Selects AMP or other component selected by the input selector button. EFFECT SILENT 30° VIDEO AUX – + – + 30° Approximately 6 m (20 feet) PREPARATION s VOL +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. d MUTE Mutes the sound. The MUTE indicator turns on when the MUTE function is on. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level. f SET MENU (MENU) Selects the SET MENU mode. • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – high humidity or temperature such as near a heater, stove or bath; – dusty places; or – in places subject to extremely low temperatures. ADVANCED OPERATION h STEREO/EFFECT Switches the normal stereo or DSP effect reproduction. When STEREO is selected, 2-channel input signals are directed to the main left and right speakers without effect sounds. All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals except for the LFE channel are also directed to the main left and right speakers. ■ Handling the remote control BASIC OPERAIONT g ON SCREEN (DISPLAY) Displays the operation status of this unit and the parameter settings for DSP programs on the monitor (see page 23). The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on the main unit during operation. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 7 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front Panel Display 2 1 V AUX DSP EX 1 3 VCR2/DVR VCR 1 CBL/SAT ES DISCRETE MATRIX VIRTUAL DIGITAL SILENT PRO LOGIC / PCM SP AB 0 qwe DSP 4 D TV/LD DVD 5 MD/TAPE CD R DTS Neo:6 DOLBY DIGITAL PRO LOGIC MOVIE TV THEATER 12 ENTERTAINMENT TUNER 6 78 CD PHONO STEREO AUTO TUNED MEMORY MUTE SLEEP BASS P. DIRECT 9 VOLUME LFE ft mS dB r indicator Lights up when you select a digital sound field program. 2 Decoder indicators When any of the decoders equipped on this unit functions, the indicator lights up. t y u i L C R RL RC RR o p a w SP A B indicator Lights up according to which set of main speakers is selected. Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are selected. e Headphones indicator 3 VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when headphones are connected. Lights up when using Virtual CINEMA DSP (see page 32). r DSP program indicators Shows the current input source with a cursor. The name of the selected DSP program lights up when the ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE THEATER 1, MOVIE THEATER 2, TV THEATER or V/DTS SURROUND DSP program is selected. 5 AUTO indicator t Multi-information display 4 Input source indicator Shows that this unit is in the automatic tuning mode. 6 SLEEP indicator Shows the current DSP program name and other information when adjusting or changing settings. Lights up while the sleep timer is on. y STEREO indicator 7 MUTE indicator Flashes while the MUTE function is on. Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an FM stereo broadcast while the “AUTO” indicator is lit. 8 BASS indicator u TUNED indicator Lights up while BASS EXTENSION is on. Lights up when this unit tunes in to a station. 9 VOLUME level indicator i MEMORY indicator Indicates the volume level. Flashes to show a station can be stored. 0 v indicator o P. DIRECT Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code modulation) digital audio signals. Lights up while PROCESSOR DIRECT is on. q SILENT indicator Lights up when headphones are connected with the sound effect (see “SILENT CINEMA DSP” on page 32). 8 p Input channel indicator Indicates the channel components of input signals being received. a LFE indicator Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Rear Panel 3 2 AUDIO DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL R MD/TAPE AUDIO L VIDEO VIDEO L R CD-R MD/TAPE OUT (REC) D-TV /LD IN (PLAY) CBL /SAT CONTROL OUT REMOTE +12V IN 15mA MAX. OUT CBL /SAT R A – + + – MAIN – + AM ANT + – (SURROUND) – + + – – + SUB WOOFER OUT CBL /SAT IMPEDANCE SELECTOR B GND R PHONO REAR SET BEFORE POWER ON IN VCR 2 /DVR MAIN FM ANT OUT 75Ω UNBAL. SURROUND D-TV /LD L PREPARATION VCR 1 CD – AC OUTLETS OUTPUT TUNER IN DVD + MONITOR OUT CD-R OUT (REC) CD 7 DVD CD CD-R COMPONENT VIDEO PR/ CR PB/ CB Y S VIDEO DVD IN (PLAY) 6 5 4 *1 INTRODUCTION 1 L MAIN A OR B: 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A+B: 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER CENTER REAR CENTER : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR MAIN A OR B: 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER CENTER REAR CENTER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR ZONE 2 OUT COAXIAL MONITOR OUT CENTER DIGITAL INPUT GND SUB WOOFER VIDEO SPEAKERS REAR CENTER S VIDEO 6CH INPUT 9 0 q w e BASIC OPERAIONT 8 CENTER r (U.S.A. and Canada models) 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks 2 Audio component jacks See pages 17 and 18 for connection information. See pages 14 to 16 for connection information. 4 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) See page 69 details. 5 CONTROL OUT (U.S.A., Canada and Australia 6 AC power cord e Speaker terminals See pages 11 and 12 for connection information. r IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch Use this switch to match the amplifier output to your speaker impedance (see page 13). Set this unit in the standby mode before you change the setting of this switch. Connect to a power outlet. < China model only > 7 AC OUTLETS FREQUENCY STEP switch See page 19. Use these outlets to supply power to your other A/V components (see page 21). VOLTAGE SELECTOR See page 21. APPENDIX 8 DIGITAL INPUT jacks ADDITIONAL INFORMATION models only) This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use. w SUBWOOFER jacks See page 20 for connection information. ADVANCED OPERATION 3 Video component jacks q Antenna input terminals See page 19 for connection information. 9 6CH INPUT jacks See page 20 for connection information. 0 ZONE 2 OUT jacks (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) See page 68 for details. *1 As this terminal is used for an examination in the factory, do not connect any equipment to this terminal. English 9 PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP Speakers to Be Used This unit has been designed to provide the best soundfield quality with a 6-speaker system, using left and right main speakers, left and right rear speakers, and a center and rear center speakers. If you use different brands of speakers (with different tonal qualities) in your system, the tone of a moving human voice and other types of sound may not shift smoothly. We recommend that you use speakers from the same manufacturer or speakers with the same tonal quality. The main speakers are used for the main source sound plus the effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers from your present stereo system. The rear speakers are used for the effect and surround sounds, and the center speaker is for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. The main speakers should be high-performance models and have enough power-handling capacity to accept the maximum output of your audio system. The other speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use the models of equivalent performance with the main speakers. ■ Use of a subwoofer expands your sound field It is also possible to further expand your system with the addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel with high fidelity when the Dolby Digital signal or the DTS signal is played back. The YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System is ideal for natural and lively bass reproduction. Speaker Placement Refer to the following diagram when you place the speakers. Center speaker Main speaker (R) Rear speaker (R) Subwoofer Main speaker (L) 1.8 m (6 feet) Rear center speaker Rear speaker (L) ■ Main speakers Place the left and right main speakers an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. ■ Center speaker Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face of your video monitor. Place the speaker as close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under the monitor and centrally between the main speakers. ■ Rear speakers Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (6 feet) above the floor. ■ Rear center speaker Place the rear center speaker in the center between the left and right rear speakers at the same height from the floor as the rear speakers. ■ Subwoofer The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce the wall reflections. CAUTION Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with a monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. Note • If you do not use any effect speakers (rear, center and/or rear center), change the settings of SPEAKER SET items in the SET MENU to designate the signals to other terminals you connect speakers to. 10 SPEAKER SETUP Connecting the Speakers CAUTION • Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other and do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. ■ Speaker cables A speaker cable is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. One of the cables is colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. 10 mm (3/8”) 2 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from each of the speaker cables. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. ■ Connecting to the SPEAKERS terminals 3 Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 1 Banana plug Unscrew the knob. 3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of each terminal. ADVANCED OPERATION 2 1 2 BASIC OPERATION 1 1 PREPARATION If necessary, use the SET MENU to change the speaker mode settings according to the number and size of the speakers in your configuration after you finish connecting your speakers. INTRODUCTION Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. y ADDITIONAL INFORMATION (For U.S.A., Canada, Australia and China models) • Banana plug connections are also possible. First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. ■ MAIN SPEAKERS terminals ■ REAR SPEAKERS terminals A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals. ■ CENTER SPEAKER terminals APPENDIX One or two speaker systems can be connected to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either of the MAIN A or B terminals. A center speaker can be connected to these terminals. English ■ REAR CENTER SPEAKER terminals A rear center speaker can be connected to these terminals. 11 SPEAKER SETUP Main A speaker Subwoofer system Right 1 AUDIO DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL R MD/TAPE AUDIO L R MD/TAPE OUT (REC) D-TV /LD IN (PLAY) CBL /SAT REMOTE CONTROL OUT +12V IN 15mA MAX. OUT CBL /SAT R + – A – + + – MAIN – + + – (SURROUND) – + + – – + L MONITOR OUT AC OUTLETS CD-R OUT (REC) VCR 1 DVD OUTPUT TUNER IN AM ANT SUB WOOFER OUT CD CBL /SAT IMPEDANCE SELECTOR B GND R PHONO REAR SET BEFORE POWER ON L IN VCR 2 /DVR CD 3 COMPONENT VIDEO PR/ CR PB/ CB Y S VIDEO Left DVD CD CD-R Right DVD IN (PLAY) CD-R 2 VIDEO VIDEO L Main B speaker Left MAIN FM ANT OUT 4ΩMIN. 8ΩMIN. 6ΩMIN. 6ΩMIN. 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER MAIN A OR B: 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER CENTER REAR CENTER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR 75Ω UNBAL. SURROUND D-TV /LD MAIN A OR B: A+B: : CENTER REAR CENTER : : REAR ZONE 2 OUT COAXIAL MONITOR OUT CENTER DIGITAL INPUT CENTER GND SUB WOOFER VIDEO SPEAKERS REAR CENTER S VIDEO 6CH INPUT (U.S.A. and Canada models) 4 5 6 Center speaker Left Right Rear speaker 6 7 Rear Center speaker 2 1 3 4 7 5 The diagram above shows the speaker layout in the listening room. ■ SUBWOOFER jack When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or rear channels are directed to this jack if they are assigned to this jack. (The cut-off frequency of this jack is 90 Hz.) The LFE (low-frequency effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed if they are assigned to this jack. Note • Depending on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” and “10 LFE LEVEL” on the SET MENU, some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER jack. 12 SPEAKER SETUP ■ IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch Select the left and right position according to the impedance of the speakers in your system. Be sure to move this switch only when this unit is in the standby mode. IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Switch position Speaker Impedance level SET BEFORE POWER ON MAIN A OR B: A+B: : CENTER REAR CENTER : : REAR 4ΩMIN. 8ΩMIN. 6ΩMIN. 6ΩMIN. 6ΩMIN. MAIN A OR B: : CENTER REAR CENTER : : REAR /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER 8ΩMIN. 8ΩMIN. 8ΩMIN. 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER Main Left The impedance must be 6 Ω or higher. Rear Center The impedance must be 6 Ω or higher. The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. Main If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher. [U.S.A. and Canada models] The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Center The impedance must be 8 Ω or higher. Rear Center The impedance must be 8 Ω or higher. IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON MAIN A OR B: 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A+B: 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER CENTER REAR CENTER : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR Right The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Rear (U.S.A. and Canada models) ADVANCED OPERATION Rear BASIC OPERATION Center AC OUTLETS MAIN A OR B: 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER CENTER REAR CENTER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher. If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. PREPARATION IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch INTRODUCTION WARNING Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power of this unit is on, otherwise this unit may be damaged. If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be fully slid to either position. If so, slide the switch to either position fully when this unit is in the standby mode. APPENDIX English 13 CONNECTIONS Before Connecting Components CAUTION Never connect this unit and other components to mains power until all connections between components have been completed. • Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Some components require different connection methods and have different jack names. Refer to the operation instructions for each component to be connected to this unit. • Use commercially available video pin cables when connecting to the S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. Connecting Video Components ■ About the video jacks There are three types of video jacks. y • The COMPONENT VIDEO jacks on this unit are independent of the S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks. • Connection depends on the availability of input jacks on your monitor. The signals input through the S VIDEO jacks can be converted to composite signals inside of this unit and output through the VIDEO jacks on this unit as well. • When signals input through both S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, signals input through the S VIDEO jack has priority. • You can designate the input for the COMPONENT VIDEO A and B jacks according to your component by using “7 I/O ASSIGNMENT” on the SET MENU (see pages 61 and 62 for details). Note • When you are using the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks, check the details in the owner’s manual that came with the component being connected. ■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) These jacks are used to connect any video input source such as a game console and a camcorder to this unit. S VIDEO VIDEO S V L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX VIDEO jack VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO jacks transmit composite signals. L R O OPTICAL OUT AUDIO OUT R AUDIO OUT L VIDEO OUT S VIDEO jack S VIDEO OUT S VIDEO S VIDEO jacks transmit S-video signals. S-video signals are separated into luminance (Y) and color (C) video signals to achieve high-quality color reproduction. COMPONENT VIDEO jacks COMPONENT VIDEO PR/ CR PB/ CB Y COMPONENT VIDEO jacks transmit component signals. Component signals are separated into luminance (Y) and color difference (PB / CB, PR/CR) to provide the best quality in picture reproduction. Refer to the owner’s manuals for your monitor and other components being connected to reproduce these signals correctly. You can connect an S-video output and component video output of your video components to this unit. Connect an S-video output to the S VIDEO jack and component video output to the COMPONENT VIDEO jack on this unit. 14 Game console or video camera CONNECTIONS OPTICAL OUTPUT DVD player COMPONENT OUTPUT AUDIO OUTPUT L O S VIDEO OUTPUT V R INTRODUCTION VIDEO OUTPUT V S V V (U.S.A. and Canada models) AUDIO DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL R MD/TAPE AUDIO L VIDEO VIDEO L R DVD DVD MD/TAPE OUT (REC) D-TV /LD IN (PLAY) CBL /SAT CBL / SAT R CD CD-R + – + – + – MONITOR OUT VCR 1 DVD CD OUT PHONO IN OUTPUT TUNER IN AM ANT CBL /SAT SUB WOOFER GND R VCR 2 /DVR MAIN FM ANT OUT 75Ω UNBAL. SURROUND D-TV /LD ZONE 2 OUT BASIC OPERATION – CD-R OUT (REC) CD + PREPARATION IN (PLAY) CD-R COMPONENT VIDEO PR/ CR PB/ CB Y S VIDEO COAXIAL MONITOR OUT CENTER GND SUB WOOFER S VIDEO 6CH INPUT L C VIDEO ADVANCED OPERATION CENTER DIGITAL INPUT R S V AUDIO OUTPUT VIDEO INPUT TV/digital TV or LD player indicates left audio pin cables R indicates right audio pin cables O indicates optical cables C indicates coaxial cables V indicates video pin cables V S VIDEO INPUT COMPONENT INPUT V V indicates component video cables V indicates S-video cables English S V APPENDIX L V Video monitor COAXIAL OUTPUT indicates signal direction S V S VIDEO OUTPUT ADDITIONAL INFORMATION VIDEO OUTPUT 15 CONNECTIONS OPTICAL OUTPUT Cable TV or Satellite tuner AUDIO OUTPUT VIDEO OUTPUT L O AUDIO DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL AUDIO L R MD/TAPE VIDEO VIDEO L R V DVD MD/TAPE OUT (REC) D-TV /LD IN (PLAY) CBL /SAT CBL / SAT MONITOR OUT CD-R OUT (REC) TUNER IN VCR 1 DVD CD OUT PHONO IN AM ANT CBL /SAT GND VCR 2 /DVR CD V COMPONENT VIDEO PR/ CR PB/ CB Y S VIDEO CD CD-R V S DVD IN (PLAY) CD-R S VIDEO OUTPUT V R COMPONENT OUTPUT MAIN FM ANT OUT 75Ω UNBAL. SURROUND D-TV /LD ZONE 2 OUT COAXIAL MONITOR OUT DIGITAL INPUT SUB WOOFER CENTER GND VIDEO S VIDEO 6CH INPUT (U.S.A. and Canada models) L R L R V VIDEO OUTPUT AUDIO INPUT V VCR 1 or VCR 2/ DVR (digital video recorder) AUDIO OUTPUT indicates signal direction L 16 indicates left audio pin cables R indicates right audio pin cables O indicates optical cables V indicates video pin cables S indicates S-video cables S S V VIDEO INPUT S S VIDEO INPUT VIDEO INPUT S VIDEO OUTPUT V Video monitor COMPONENT INPUT S VIDEO INPUT V V V indicates component video cables V V CONNECTIONS Connecting Audio Components This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are acceptable for 96-kHz sampling digital signals. • You can designate the input for each digital jacks according to your component by using “7 I/O ASSIGNMENT” on the SET MENU (see pages 61 and 62 for details). Notes ■ Connecting an MD recorder, tape deck or CD recorder y • DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks and analog OUT(REC) are independent. Only digital signals are output from DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks and analog signals from OUT(REC) jacks. • When you connect your recording component to both the analog and digital input and output jacks, the priority is given to the digital signal. Notes • When you connect a recording component to this unit, keep its power on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit may distort the sound from other components. • When you record from a source component connected to this unit while this unit is set in the standby mode, the recorded sound may be distorted. To avoid this problem, turn on this unit. ADVANCED OPERATION • DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks and analog OUT (REC) jacks are independent. Only digital signals are output from DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks and analog signals from OUT (REC) jacks. • The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard. If you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this standard, this unit may not function properly. BASIC OPERATION About the dust protection cap Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This cap protects the jack from dust. • The COAXIAL CD and OPTICAL CD jacks are available for a CD player which has coaxial or optical digital output jacks. • When you connect a CD player to both the COAXIAL CD and OPTICAL CD jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL CD jack. PREPARATION y ■ Connecting a CD player y INTRODUCTION ■ Connecting to digital jacks ■ Connecting a turntable ADDITIONAL INFORMATION PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge, use an in-line boosting transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to these jacks. y • Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in the signal. However you may hear less noise without the connection to the GND terminal for some record players. APPENDIX English 17 CONNECTIONS INPUT OPTICAL INPUT MD recorder or tape deck OUTPUT L O R L R OPTICAL INPUT AUDIO DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL R MD/TAPE CD recorder L OUTPUT IN (PLAY) MD/TAPE CD-R CD player INPUT OUT (REC) OPTICAL OUTPUT O CD L IN (PLAY) O CD-R CD-R R O L R OUT (REC) OUTPUT DVD OPTICAL OUTPUT CD L CBL /SAT R PHONO MAIN CD C COAXIAL OUTPUT SURROUND D-TV /LD COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT CENTER GND SUB WOOFER 6CH INPUT (U.S.A. and Canada models) L R L GND L SURROUND OUTPUT OUTPUT SUBWOOFER OUTPUT CENTER OUTPUT Turntable indicates signal direction 18 R L indicates left audio pin cables R indicates right audio pin cables O indicates optical cables C indicates coaxial cables External decoder See page 20 R MAIN OUTPUT CONNECTIONS Connecting the Antennas Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. FREQUENCY STEP switch (For China model) Because the interstation frequency spacing differs in different areas, set the FREQUENCY STEP switch (locating on FM AM the rear panel) according to the frequency spacing in your area. North, Central and South America: 100 kHz/10 kHz Other area: 50 kHz/9 kHz Before setting this switch, disconnect the AC power plug of this unit from the AC outlet. ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna 1 Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it. 2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND terminals. 3 Orient the AM loop antenna for the beat reception. INTRODUCTION Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. 100kHz/10kHz 50kHz/9kHz Indoor FM antenna (included) COMPONENT VIDEO PR / C R PB / C B Y VD BL SAT BASIC OPERATION AM loop antenna (included) PREPARATION FREQUENCY STEP NITOR UT ADVANCED OPERATION TUNER AM ANT GND y FM ANT • The AM loop antenna can be removed from the stand and attached to a wall, etc. 75Ω UNBAL. A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about the outdoor antennas. APPENDIX ■ Connecting the indoor FM antenna Notes • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. Connect the included indoor FM antenna to the 75Ω UNBAL. FM ANT terminal. English 19 CONNECTIONS Connecting to a Subwoofer Connecting to the 6CH INPUT Jacks OUTPUT SUB WOOFER SUBWOOFER jack When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or rear channels are directed to this jack if they are assigned to this jack. (The cut-off frequency of this jack is 90 Hz.) The LFE (low-frequency effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed if they are assigned to this jack. Notes • Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer. It is also possible to adjust the volume level by using the remote control of this unit (see ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS on page 66). • Depending on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” and “10 LFE LEVEL” on the SET MENU, some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER jack. 20 This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right MAIN, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from an external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier. Connect the output jacks on your external decoder to the 6CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the main and surround channels. Notes • When 6CH INPUT is selected, the signals input to the 6CH INPUT jacks have priority over any other input source. • When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot listen to DSP programs. • When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, settings of “1 SPEAKER SET (1A to 1E)” on the SET MENU do not apply. • When headphones are used, only main L/R channels are output. • Setting for “15 6CH INPUT SET” on the SET MENU will be applied when 6CH INPUT is selected. CONNECTIONS Connecting the Power Supply Cords Plug this unit into the wall outlet. Plug in the other components connected to this unit to the wall outlet. ■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) AC OUTLETS To AC outlet A OR B: A+B: : ER CENTER : : 4ΩMIN. 8ΩMIN. 6ΩMIN. 6ΩMIN. 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER AIN A OR B: 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER ENTER EAR CENTER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER EAR VOLTAGE SELECTOR The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/ 220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. ADVANCED OPERATION VOLTAGE SELECTOR ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China model only) BASIC OPERAIONT (U.S.A. and Canada models) PREPARATION EDANCE SELECTOR T BEFORE POWER ON U.S.A., Canada and China models ............... 2 OUTLETS Australia model .............................................. 1 OUTLET Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your components to this unit. The power to the AC OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). These outlets will supply power to any connected component whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to the AC OUTLET(S) is: U.S.A. and Canada models ...................................... 80 W China model ............................................................. 50 W Australia model ...................................................... 100 W INTRODUCTION ■ Connecting the AC power cord AC OUTLETS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION PEDANCE SELECTOR T BEFORE POWER ON N A OR B: A+B: : TER R CENTER : : R 4ΩMIN. 8ΩMIN. 6ΩMIN. 6ΩMIN. 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER MAIN A OR B: 8ΩMIN. A+B: 16ΩMIN. : 8ΩMIN. CENTER REAR CENTER : 8ΩMIN. : 8ΩMIN. REAR /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER APPENDIX (China model) English 21 CONNECTIONS Turning on the Power When all connections are completed, turn on the power of this unit. 1 VOLUME NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER D I G I T A L STANDBY /ON 6CH INPUT MODE A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING STEREO PROGRAM PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE BASS TREBLE TUNER SPEAKERS A B PROCESSOR BASS DIRECT EXTENSION MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO EDIT PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL DSP EFFECT SILENT TRANSMIT VIDEO AUX RE–NAME CLEAR – + – + LEARN SYSTEM 1 POWER STANDBY SLEEP 6CH INPUT A PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD SELECT POWER POWER TV AV AMP REC 1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power of this unit. SYSTEM POWER STANDBY /ON Front panel 2 22 or Remote control Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD) INTRODUCTION You can display the operation information for this unit on a video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and DSP program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much easier to see the available options and parameters than it is by reading this information on the front panel display. Selecting the OSD Mode SELECT y POWER POWER TV AV AMP 2 REC • If a video source is being reproduced, the OSD is superimposed over the image. • The OSD signal is not output to the REC OUT jack, and will not be recorded with any video signal. • You can set the OSD to turn on (gray background) or off when a video source is not being reproduced (or the source component is turned off) by using “13 DISPLAY SET” on the SET MENU (see page 65). VOL – LEVEL TITLE CH – PRESET CH + PRESET TEST ON SCREEN TV VOL RETURN – STEREO DISPLAY 3 EFFECT 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Press AMP to select the AMP mode. AMP appears in the display window on the remote control. 3 ON SCREEN Press ON SCREEN on the DISPLAY remote control repeatedly to change the display mode. The OSD mode changes in the following order: full display, short display, and display off. AMP Notes • If your video monitor is connected only to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks of this unit, the OSD is not shown. Make sure to connect your video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks and either VIDEO or S VIDEO jacks if you want to see the OSD. • Playing back video software that has an anti-copy signal or video signals with a lot of noise may produce unstable images. ≥ DSP LEVEL…………0dB INIT.DLY…………45ms ROOM SIZE…………1.O LIVENESS…………………5 P01 CONCERT HALL Full display ADDITIONAL INFORMATION P01 CONCERT HALL A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE SELECT ADVANCED OPERATION Display off This mode briefly shows the “DISPLAY OFF” message at the bottom of the screen and then disappears. Afterwards, no changes to operations appear on the monitor except those of the ON SCREEN button. TV VOL MUTE MENU BASIC OPERAIONT Short display This mode briefly shows the same contents as the front panel display at the bottom of the screen and then disappears. SET MENU + TV INPUT You can change the amount of information the OSD shows. Full display This mode always shows the DSP program parameter settings on the video monitor. + PREPARATION OSD Modes AUDIO DISC SKIP Short display y APPENDIX • When you choose the full display mode, INPUT, VOLUME and some other types of operation information are displayed at the bottom of the screen in the same format as that for the front panel display. • The SET MENU and test tone display appear regardless of the OSD mode. English 23 SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS This unit has 6 SPEAKER SET items on the SET MENU that you must set according to the number of speakers in your configuration and their size. The following table summarizes these SPEAKER SET items, and shows the initial settings as well as other possible settings. If the initial settings shown in the following table are not appropriate for your speaker configuration, change settings following the steps described in “1 SPEAKER SET” from pages 56 to 59. Summary of SPEAKER SET Items 1A through 1G Item Description Control value (default setting indicated in bold) 1A CENTER SP Selects the output mode according to whether or not a center speaker is being used and its performance. LRG/SML/NONE 1B MAIN SP Selects the output mode according to the performance of the main speakers. LARGE/SMALL 1C REAR L/R SP Selects the output mode according to whether or not rear L/R speakers are being used and their performance. LRG/SML/NONE 1D REAR CT SP Selects the Rear Center channel output according to the size of the Rear Center speaker. LRG/SML/NONE 1E LFE/BASS OUT Selects the speaker according to use for LFE signal output and low bass signal. SWFR/MAIN/BOTH 1F MAIN LEVEL Selects the main speaker level. Normal/–10 dB 1G SP B SET Select the location of the main speakers to be connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. MAIN / ZONE B 24 ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS Use the test tone to balance the output levels of the speakers required for a surround sound system. The adjustment of each speaker output level should be made at your listening position with the remote control. After completing the adjustments, use VOL +/– at your listening position to check if the adjustments are satisfactory. SELECT Before You Begin POWER POWER TV AV AMP 1 PREPARATION Note • Since this unit cannot enter the test mode while headphones are connected to this unit, be sure to unplug the headphones from the PHONES jack when using the test tone. Using the Test Tone (TEST DOLBY SUR.) INTRODUCTION This section explains how to adjust the speaker output levels by using the test tone generator. When this adjustment is made, the output level heard at the listening position will be the same from each speaker. This is important for the best performance of the digital sound field processor, and various decoders (Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Pro Logic , DTS, DTS ES, and DTS Neo: 6). REC AUDIO DISC SKIP + VOL – 3 VOLUME D I G I T A L TITLE SET MENU + TV VOL 6CH INPUT 4 2,5 MODE A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING STEREO PROGRAM PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE BASS TREBLE TUNER SPEAKERS A B PROCESSOR BASS DIRECT EXTENSION MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO EDIT PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R CH – MENU A/B/C/D/E TV INPUT STANDBY /ON TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TEST ON SCREEN TV VOL RETURN MUTE BASIC OPERAIONT LEVEL NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER – STEREO DISPLAY EFFECT OPTICAL DSP EFFECT SILENT VIDEO AUX – 1 2 1 Press AMP to select the AMP mode. AMP appears in the display window on the remote control. 2 Press TEST to output the test tone. 3 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. Press SPEAKERS A or B to select the main speakers to be used. If you are using two sets of the main speakers, press both A and B. AMP TEST RETURN SPEAKERS A B 3 Adjust the volume of this unit so you can hear the test tone. + VOL ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 3 + ADVANCED OPERATION 2 3 – + – Set the BASS and TREBLE controls on the front panel to the center position and turn off BASS EXTENSION and PROCESSOR DIRECT by pressing the buttons. “BASS EXT. OFF” and “P. DIRECT OFF” appear on the front panel display. BASS TREBLE APPENDIX PROCESSOR BASS DIRECT EXTENSION Set to OFF. – + – + English 25 ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS LEFT RIGHT 4 CENTER SUBWOOFER Adjust the output level of the effect speakers using j / i so the output level coming from the effect speakers is the same as that of the main speakers. While adjusting, the test tone is heard from the selected speaker. + TV VOL CH TV MUTE SELECT – PRESET CH + PRESET TV VOL – Note LEFT SURROUND RIGHT SURROUND • The output level of the main speakers cannot be adjusted here. 5 REAR CENTER The test tone is heard from the left main speaker, center speaker, right main speaker, right rear speaker, rear center and left rear speaker in order. The tone is produced for 2.5 seconds each time. The state of the test tone output is also shown on the monitor by an image of the audio listening room. This is convenient for adjusting each speaker level. TEST DOLBY SUR. LEFT Front panel display also indicates from which speaker the test tone is output in the order of TEST LEFT→TEST CENTER→TEST RIGHT→ TEST R SUR.→TEST REAR CNTR→TEST L SUR. →TEST SUBWOOFER Note • If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set this unit in the standby mode and check the speaker connections. 26 When the adjustment is complete, press TEST to stop the test tone. TEST RETURN Notes • The tonal quality of the center speaker can be adjusted by using “5 CENTER GEQ” on the SET MENU (see page 60). • If “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the center channel sound is automatically output from the left and right main speakers. • If “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the output level of the rear right, left and center speakers cannot be adjusted in step 4. The test tone will be circulated in the order of LEFT→CENTER→RIGHT→SUBWOOFER→LEFT..., skipping the rear right and left speakers and the rear center speaker. • If “1D REAR CT SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the out level of the rear center speaker cannot be adjusted in step 4. The test tone will be circulated in the order of LEFT→CENTER→RIGHT→RIGHT SURROUND→LEFT SURROUND→SUBWOOFER→LEFT ..., skipping the rear center speaker. y • It is not necessary to readjust the speaker level once it is set as long as you do not change the speakers. You can enjoy listening to or watching the input source with the desired volume by adjusting the volume key. • You can increase the output levels of the effect speakers (center, left rear and right rear and rear center) to +10 dB. If the output level of these speakers is lower than that of the main speakers even after you have increased the output level of these speakers up to +10 dB, set “1F MAIN LEVEL” on the SET MENU to –10 dB (see page 59). This setting decreases the main speaker output level to about one-third of the normal level. After you have set “1F MAIN LEVEL” on the SET MENU to –10 dB, adjust the levels for the center and rear speakers again. BASIC PLAYBACK 6 4 VOLUME NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER D I G I T A L STANDBY /ON 6CH INPUT MODE A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING STEREO PROGRAM PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE BASS Rotate INPUT (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the input source. The current input source name and input mode appear on the front panel display and on the video monitor for a few seconds. TREBLE TUNER SPEAKERS A B PROCESSOR BASS DIRECT EXTENSION MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO EDIT PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R INTRODUCTION 14 4 OPTICAL A PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD DSP EFFECT SILENT VIDEO AUX – – + + PREPARATION or 4 1 6 7 3 6 TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR STANDBY SLEEP 6CH INPUT A PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD REC + DISC SKIP 6 V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME VOL – TITLE CH POWER POWER TV AV – AMP TV MUTE SELECT + – DISPLAY HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB EFFECT ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER MOVIE THEATER 1 5 6 7 8 /DTS SUR. 7 EX/ES SELECT 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX SYSTEM POWER or Front panel Note • The input source names correspond to the jack names on the rear panel of this unit, not the names of the component connected to this unit. To select a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks Press 6CH (INPUT) until “6CH INPUT” appears on the front panel display and on the video monitor. 6CH INPUT Remote control 3 Press SPEAKERS A or B to select the main speakers to be used. If you are using two sets of main speakers, press both A and B. The speaker indicator(s) for the selected set(s) lights up on the front panel display. Front panel Remote control SPEAKERS A B Notes • If “6CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display and on the video monitor, no other source can be played. To select another input source with INPUT (the input selector buttons on the remote control), press 6CH (INPUT) to turn off “6CH INPUT” from the front panel display and the video monitor. • If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video source and then press 6CH (INPUT). APPENDIX Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. or ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 2 6CH ADVANCED OPERATION Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power. STANDBY /ON R Selected input source STEREO ON SCREEN TV VOL 9 L CH PRESET TEST RETURN MOVIE THEATER 2 AUTO MENU A/B/C/D/E PRESET REC DVD SP A MUTE SET MENU + TV VOL TV INPUT BASIC OPERATION LEVEL SELECT 1 Remote control LEARN SYSTEM POWER AUDIO 4 INPUT Front panel English 27 BASIC PLAYBACK 5 Start playback or select a broadcast station on the source component. Refer to the operation instructions for the component. Note • If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. 6 Adjust the volume to the desired output level. ■ BGV (background video) function The BGV function allows you to combine a video image from a video source with a sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while having beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. Select a source from the video group and then select a source from the audio group with the input selector buttons on the remote control. This selection for BGV cannot be made with INPUT on the front panel. A PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD VOLUME + or VOL – Front panel ■ To mute the sound Remote control BASS – TREBLE + – y BASS EXTENSION + Notes • If the component connected to the VCR 1 OUT, VCR 2/DVR OUT, CD-R OUT and MD/TAPE OUT jacks is turned off, the reproduced sound may be distorted or the volume may be lowered for the characteristics of AV receivers. In this case, turn on the component. • BASS EXTENSION may not be effective if “1B MAIN SP” on the SET MENU is set to SMALL and “1E LFE/BASS OUT” is set to SWFR. 7 Select a DSP program if desired. Use PROGRAM l / h (DSP program buttons on the remote control) to select a DSP program. See pages 30 to 33 for details about the DSP program. HALL PROGRAM or 1 2 3 4 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER MOVIE THEATER 1 5 9 28 JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 6 MOVIE THEATER 2 Front panel CHURCH 7 8 SELECT EX/ES 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX /DTS SUR. MUTE Press MUTE on the remote control. To resume the audio output, press MUTE again. If desired, use BASS, TREBLE and BASS EXTENSION. These controls are only effective for sound from the main speakers. Remote control • You can also cancel mute to press any operation buttons such as VOL +/–. • During muting, the “MUTE” indicator flashes on the front panel display. • When this unit enters the standby mode, the mute function will be cancelled. ■ When you have finished using this unit Press STANDBY/ON (STANDBY on the remote control) to set this unit in the standby mode. STANDBY STANDBY /ON Front panel or Remote control BASIC PLAYBACK ■ Notes on the digital signal Input Modes and Indications Press MODE (the input selector button that you have pressed to select the input source on the remote control) repeatedly until the desired input mode is shown on the front panel display and on the video monitor. PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD or • DSP programs cannot be selected. Sound will be output as normal 2-channel stereo sound from only the left and right main speakers. • Use the coaxial input (COAXIAL IN) jack to input over 96 kHz digital signals. The signals may not be correctly played back if the optical input (OPTICAL IN) jack is used. • Level adjustment for effect speakers other than a subwoofer is not possible. ■ Notes on playing DTS-CD/LDs Front panel V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE DVD CD R TUNER CD PHONO AUTO VOLUME L R Input mode AUTO: ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Notes APPENDIX • If digital signals are input from both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, the digital signal from the COAXIAL jack has precedence over the OPTICAL jack. • In playing the disc encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS on some LD or DVD players, the sound output delays for a moment when playback resumes after a search because the digital signal is selected again. • When playing the LD source that has not been digitally recorded, the sound may not be output for some LD players. In this case, set the input mode to ANALOG. ADVANCED OPERATION In this mode, the input signal is automatically selected in the following order: 1) Digital signal 2) Analog signal DTS: In this mode, only the digital input signal encoded with DTS is selected even if another signal is input at the same time. ANALOG: In this mode, only the analog input signal is selected even if a digital signal is input at the same time. • If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. • If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and set the input mode to ANALOG, this unit reproduces the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. When you want to play a DTS source, be sure to connect the source to a digital input jack and set the input mode to AUTO or DTS. • If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while playing a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit reproduces no sound. • If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal with the input mode set to AUTO; – This unit automatically switches to the DTSdecoding mode (The “t” indicator lights up.) after having detected the DTS signal. When playback of the DTS source is completed, the “t” indicator may flash. While this indicator is flashing, only DTS source can be played. If you want to play a normal PCM source soon, set the input mode back to AUTO. – The “t” indicator may flash when a search or skip operation is performed while the DTS source is playing back with the input mode set to AUTO. If this status continues for longer than 30 seconds, this unit will automatically switch from “DTS-decoding” mode to PCM digital signal input mode. The “t” indicator will turn off. BASIC OPERATION SP A CBL/SAT Remote control PREPARATION MODE A The digital input jacks of this unit can handle up to a 96 kHz sampling digital signal. Both OPTICAL and COAXIAL input jacks can be used to input the digital signal up to 48 kHz. However when inputting a higher digital signal than 48 kHz, be aware of the following points. INTRODUCTION This unit comes with various input jacks. You can set the priority of the input signal among different types of input signals. y English • When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the type of signal. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate setting. • When you turn on the power of this unit, the input mode is set according to “8 INPUT MODE” on the SET MENU (see page 62 for details). 29 BASIC PLAYBACK 3 Selecting a Sound Field Program You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a DSP program. There are 10 programs with sub-programs available with this unit. However the selection depends on the input signal format and not all the sub-programs are possible for all input signal formats. For details about each program, see pages 34 to 38. After selecting the desired program, press the same button repeatedly to select the desired sub-program if available. For example, to select the sub-program “70 mm SciFi”, press MOVIE THEATER 1 repeatedly. HALL CHURCH ROCK CONCERT 2 3 4 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER MOVIE THEATER 1 5 6 7 8 SELECT EX/ES MOVIE THEATER 2 9 VOLUME NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER JAZZ CLUB 1 ENTERTAINMENT /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX D I G I T A L STANDBY /ON 6CH INPUT MODE A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING STEREO PROGRAM PRESET /TUNING TUNING MODE FM/AM MEMORY BASS TREBLE Program name TUNER SPEAKERS A B PROCESSOR BASS DIRECT EXTENSION MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO EDIT PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL DSP EFFECT SILENT VIDEO AUX – – + + V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 DSP 2 TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR STANDBY SLEEP 6CH INPUT A PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD + DISC SKIP VOL – LEVEL SELECT CH AV TV VOL TV INPUT – AMP MUTE SET MENU + TITLE TV MENU A/B/C/D/E CH TV MUTE SELECT PRESET + PRESET TEST STEREO ON SCREEN TV VOL REC RETURN – DISPLAY HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB EFFECT ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER MOVIE THEATER 1 5 6 7 8 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 /DTS SUR. SELECT EX/ES 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX 2,3 1 Press AMP to select the AMP mode. 2 Press PROGRAM l / h (one of the numeric buttons on the remote control) to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears on the front panel display and on the video monitor. AMP HALL PROGRAM or CHURCH 1 2 3 4 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER MOVIE THEATER 1 5 6 9 Front panel 7 8 SELECT EX/ES 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX /DTS SUR. Remote control Program name VCR2/DVR VCR 1 DSP CBL/SAT D TV/LD MOVIE PRO LOGIC / SP A DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME THEATER 1 70mm Spectacle Sub-program name 30 CD R TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME 70mm Sci-Fi L R L • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last DSP program used with that source. • When you set this unit in the standby mode, the current source and DSP program are memorized and are automatically selected when you turn on the power again. • If a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program (No. 8–10) automatically switches to the appropriate decoding program. • When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/ Normal or PRO LOGIC/Enhanced, PRO LOGIC Movie, or Neo: 6 Cinema, no sound will be heard from the main speakers and the rear speakers. Sound can only be heard from the center speaker. However, if “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the center channel sound is output from the main speakers. • When a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit is selected, the digital sound field processor cannot be used. • When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, the DSP program cannot be selected. In this case, the sound is reproduced as normal 2-channel stereo. y • Choose a DSP program based on your listening preference, and not on the name of the program. The acoustics of your listening room affect the DSP program. Minimize the sound reflections in your room to maximize the effect created by the program. ROCK CONCERT JAZZ CLUB ENTERTAINMENT MOVIE THEATER 2 V AUX MD/TAPE Notes REC AUDIO 1 SP A DVD THEATER 1 Sub-program name SYSTEM POWER D TV/LD LEARN POWER POWER CBL/SAT MOVIE PRO LOGIC / R BASIC PLAYBACK 3 Selecting PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC or Neo: 6 Select a decoder. Press SELECT to select PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC or Neo: 6. CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER MOVIE THEATER 1 5 9 6 /DTS SUR. 7 8 SELECT EX/ES 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX VOLUME NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER ROCK CONCERT HALL MOVIE THEATER 2 INTRODUCTION You can enjoy the 2-channel sources decoded into five or six discrete channels by selecting PRO LOGIC or Neo: 6 in the program No. 10. D I G I T A L STANDBY /ON 6CH INPUT 4 MODE A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING STEREO PROGRAM PRESET /TUNING TUNING MODE FM/AM MEMORY BASS TREBLE TUNER SPEAKERS A B PROCESSOR BASS DIRECT EXTENSION MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO EDIT PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL DSP SILENT VIDEO AUX – + – + • When PRO LOGIC is selected Movie ↔ Music • When Neo: 6 is selected Cinema ↔ Music 2 REC AUDIO + DISC SKIP VOL – LEVEL TITLE A/B/C/D/E CH TV MUTE SELECT – + PRESET CHURCH JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER MOVIE THEATER 1 5 6 7 8 SELECT EX/ES BASIC OPERATION CH MENU TV VOL TV INPUT HALL MUTE SET MENU + PRESET TEST STEREO ON SCREEN TV VOL RETURN – DISPLAY HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB MOVIE THEATER 2 EFFECT 2 3 4 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER MOVIE THEATER 1 5 6 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 7 8 SELECT EX/ES 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX /DTS SUR. 9 ROCK CONCERT 1 ENTERTAINMENT /DTS SUR. 2,3,4 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX Note • PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC only 2-channel sources. 2 (Operating using the front panel) Select a decoder and subprogram. Press PROGRAM l / h on the front panel repeatedly to select PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC , or Neo: 6. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Select a 2-channel source and start playback on the source component. and Neo: 6 decoders can decode ADVANCED OPERATION 1 PROGRAM Front panel ROCK CONCERT CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER MOVIE THEATER 1 5 6 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 /DTS SUR. APPENDIX (Operating using the remote control) /DTS SUR. on the remote control. Press The previously selected sub program appears on the front panel display. HALL 7 8 SELECT EX/ES 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX PREPARATION EFFECT Select a subprogram suitable for the source. The selection switches as follows each time /DTS SUR. is pressed. • When PRO LOGIC is selected Normal ↔ Enhanced Remote control VCR2/DVR VCR 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO English V AUX VOLUME DOLBY DIGITAL PRO LOGIC 96/24 PRO LOGIC / SP A ~~~PRO~LOGIC II L R 31 BASIC PLAYBACK ■ Playing the Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES software ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP Press EX/ES to turn on the Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES decoder to listen to the Dolby Digital EX and DTS ES software with a rear center speaker. EX/ES 12 CHP/INDEX With the Virtual CINEMA DSP, you can enjoy all the DSP programs without rear speakers. It creates the virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field. The sound field processing is changed to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode according to the selected DSP program by setting “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET MENU to NONE. Note V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 DSP EX CBL/SAT D TV/LD MOVIE DIGITAL SP A DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME THEATER 1 Matrix 6.1 ~ LFE L RL C R RR (Example: when playing the Dolby Digital EX software) Press EX/ES to select the mode. (The modes that can be selected vary depending on the format of the software to play.) AUTO: This mode automatically switches Dolby Digital EX/DTS ES Matrix 6.1/DTS ES Discrete 6.1 depending on the signal in the input source that this unit can detect. Rear center speaker does not work for 5.1 channel sources. Discrete 6.1: This mode can be selected only when the source with DTS ES Discrete format has been detected. (The DISCRETE indicator lights up.) Matrix 6.1: This mode makes 6-channel playback of the input source through the Matrix 6.1 decoder. EX or MATRIX indicator lights (Either up.) OFF: Rear center speaker does not work in this mode. Notes • Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal (flag) which this unit can automatically detect. When playing these kinds of discs with 6.1-channel, select “Matrix 6.1”. • 6.1-channel playback is not possible even if EX/ES is pressed in the following cases: 1 When “1C REAR L/R SP”is set to “NONE”. 2 When the sound effect is turned off. 3 When the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jack is being played. 4 When Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played. 5 When the power of this unit is turned off, the input mode will be reset to AUTO. 6 When headphones are connected. 32 • This unit is not set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if “1C REAR L/R SP” is set to NONE in the following cases: – when the 6ch Stereo, DOLBY DIGITAL Normal, Pro Logic Normal, Pro Logic , DTS Normal or Neo: 6 program is selected; – when the sound effect is turned off; – when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source; – when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit; – when using the test tone; or – when connecting the headphones. ■ SILENT CINEMA DSP You can enjoy the powerful sound field as if there were actual speakers with the SILENT CINEMA DSP. You can listen to SILENT CINEMA DSP by connecting your headphones to the PHONES jack while the digital sound field processor is on. Enjoy all the DSP program using the headphones. The “SILENT” indicator lights up on the front panel display. (If the sound effect is off, you listen to the source with normal stereo reproduction.) Note • This unit is not set in the SILENT CINEMA DSP mose even if the sound effect is on in the following cases: –when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source –when over 48 kHZ sampling digital signals are being input BASIC PLAYBACK ■ Normal Stereo Reproduction INTRODUCTION Press STEREO/EFFECT to turn off the sound effect for normal stereo reproduction. Press STEREO/EFFECT again to turn the sound effect back on. STEREO STEREO or EFFECT EFFECT Front panel Remote control PREPARATION Notes BASIC OPERATION • If “1B MAIN SP” on the SET MENU is set to “SMALL” and “1E LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SW”, or “1E LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH”, the LFE signals will be output from the subwoofer. • If you turn off the sound effect while a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being output, the dynamic range of the signal is automatically compressed and the sounds of the center and rear speaker channels are mixed and output from the main speakers. • The volume may be greatly reduced when you turn off the sound effect or if you set “11 D-RANGE” on the SET MENU to MIN. In this case turn on the sound effect. ■ Displaying the information about the input source 1 2 ADVANCED OPERATION You can display the information such as the type, format and sampling frequency of the signal input from the component connected to this unit during stereo reproduction. (While playing a source) Press AMP to select the AMP mode. Press d/u to display the information about the input signal. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION + TV VOL CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TV VOL – APPENDIX English 33 DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP) Understanding Sound Fields A sound field is defined as the “characteristic sound reflections of a particular space.” In concert halls and other music venues, we hear early reflections and reverberations as well as the direct sound produced by the artist(s). The variations in the early reflections and other reverberations among the different music venues is what gives each venue its special and recognizable sound quality. YAMAHA sent teams of sound engineers all around the world to measure the sound reflections of famous concert halls and music venues, and collect detailed sound field information such as the direction, strength, range, and delay time of those reflections. Then we stored this enormous amount of data in the ROM chips of this unit. Hi-Fi DSP Programs Recreating the sound field of a concert hall or an opera house requires localizing the virtual sound sources in your listening room. The traditional stereo system that uses only two speakers is not capable of recreating a realistic sound field. YAMAHA’s DSP requires four effect speakers to recreate sound fields based on the measured sound field data. The processor controls the strength and delay time of the signals output from the four effect speakers to localize the virtual sound sources in a full circle around the listener. CINEMA-DSP Filmmakers intend the dialog to be located right on the screen, the effect sound a little farther back, the music spread even farther back, and the surround sound around the listener. Of course, all of these sounds must be synchronized with the images on the screen. CINEMA-DSP is an upgraded version of YAMAHA DSP specially designed for movie soundtracks. CINEMA-DSP integrates the DTS, Dolby Digital, and Dolby Pro Logic surround sound technologies with YAMAHA DSP sound field programs to provide the surround sound field. It recreates the most complete movie sound design in your audio room. In CINEMA-DSP sound field programs, YAMAHA’s exclusive DSP processing is added to the right and left Main and Center channels, so the listener can enjoy realistic dialogue, depth of sound, smooth transition between sound sources, and a surround sound field that goes beyond the screen. When a DTS or Dolby Digital signal is detected, the CINEMA-DSP sound field processor automatically chooses the most suitable sound field program for that signal. L SURROUND SOUND FIELD PRESENCE SOUND FIELD DIALOG R SURROUND SOUND FIELD 34 EFFECT MUSIC DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP) Straight Decode This unit is equipped with various precise decoders; Select any of the STRAIGHT DECODE modes in Program 10 (except for the sub-program “Enhanced.”) to use any of these decoders for reproducing the original sound without any sound effects added. In this case, no DSP effect is applied and the DSP indicator turns off. The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without using matrix processing. This unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs provide the same quality of sound and sound localization that 6-channel soundtracks do. The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality sound designed for movie theaters into your home. With this unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs, you can recreate a dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being at a public theater in your listening room by using Dolby Digital or DTS technology. PREPARATION Sound Field Effect INTRODUCTION • Dolby Digital/DTS decoder for multi-channel reproduction of the original sound • Dolby Digital EX/DTS ES decoder for an additional rear center channel • Dolby Pro Logic/Pro Logic /DTS Neo:6 decoder for multi-channel reproduction of 2-channel sources ■ Dolby Digital/DTS + DSP sound field effect Right surround DSP sound field ■ Dolby Digital EX/DTS ES + DSP sound field effect These programs provide you with the maximum experience of the spacious surround effects since an extra rear center DSP sound field created from the rear center channel is added. ADVANCED OPERATION Left surround DSP sound field BASIC OPERATION These programs use YAMAHA’s tri-field DSP processing on each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front, left surround and right surround channels. This processing enables this unit to reproduce the immense sound field and surround expression of a Dolby Digital- or DTSequipped movie theater without sacrificing the clear separation of all channels. Presence DSP sound field ■ Dolby Pro Logic + DSP sound field effect Surround DSP sound field /DTS Neo: 6 Dolby Pro Logic and DTS Neo: 6 equipped on this unit decode the 2-channel Dolby Surround software into five or six full range channels. They also provide two modes; MOVIE/CINEMA for movies and MUSIC for 2-channel sources. APPENDIX ■ Dolby Pro Logic ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Most movie software has 4-channel (left, center, right and surround) sound information encoded by Dolby Surround matrix processing and stored on the left and right tracks. These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro Logic decoder. The MOVIE THEATER programs for 2-channel sources are designed to recreate the spaciousness and delicate nuances of sound that tend to be lost in the encoding and decoding processes. Presence DSP sound field English 35 DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP) Features of DSP Programs CINEMA DSP Hi-Fi DSP Mode The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. 36 Type of sources For music sources For audiovideo sources No. Program Sub program Features 1 CONCERT HALL — A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections from all directions emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great deal of presence, and your virtual seat is near the center, close to the stage. 2 CHURCH — This program recreates the acoustic environment of a big church with a high dome and columns along each side. The reverberation delay is very long while the early reflections are smaller than with other sound field programs. 3 JAZZ CLUB — This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering a real and vibrant sound. 4 ROCK CONCERT — The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall. 5 ENTERTAINMENT 5 ENTERTAINMENT 6 MUSIC VIDEO 7 TV THEATER Disco This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-energy, “immediate” sound. 6ch Stereo Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field suitable for background music at parties. Game This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds. — This program produces an enthusiastic atmosphere and lets you feel as if you are at an actual jazz or rock concert. Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth using only the presence sound field. Variety/Sports Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. With this program, you can enjoy watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. Mode DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP) Type of sources No. CINEMA DSP This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form of science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid the silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. General This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the echo effect of conversations without losing clarity. DOLBY DIGITAL Enhanced DTS DIGITAL SUR Enhanced PROLOGIC Enhanced This program ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker systems of the 35-mm film theaters. Dolby Pro Logic decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or DTS decoding and digital sound field processing create precise effects without altering the original sound orientation. The surround effects produced by this sound field wrap around the viewer naturally from the back to the left and right, and toward the screen. DOLBY DIGITAL Normal DTS DIGITAL SUR Normal PRO LOGIC Normal PRO LOGIC Movie MOVIE THEATER 2 The built-in decoder precisely reproduces sounds and sound effects from sources. The highly efficient decoding process improves crosstalk and channel separation and makes sound positioning smoother and more precise. In this program, no DSP effect is applied. To reproduce 2 channel sources decoding into multichannels in each decoding mode. APPENDIX STRAIGHT DECODE 10 Music DTS Neo:6 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Sci-Fi ADVANCED OPERATION This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). BASIC OPERATION Spectacle For movie programs 10 Features PREPARATION 9 MOVIE THEATER 1 Sub program INTRODUCTION 8 Program Cinema Music English 37 DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP) Table of Program Names for Each Input Format Input No. 8 9 10 DOLBY DIGITAL 2 channel Stereo DOLBY DIGITAL EX decoder: inactive (off) DOLBY DIGITAL EX decoder: active (on) DTS ES decoder: inactive (off) DTS ES decoder: active (on) 70 mm Spectacle DGTL Spectacle Spectacle EX DTS Spectacle Spectacle ES 70 mm Sci-Fi DGTL Sci-Fi Sci-Fi EX DTS Sci-Fi Sci-Fi ES 70 mm Adventure DGTL Adventure Adventure EX DTS Adventure Adventure ES 70 mm General DGTL General General EX DTS General General ES — Normal Dolby D EX — — — Enhanced EX Enhanced — — — — — Normal ES Matrix 6.1*1 ES Dscrt 6.1 *2 — — — Enhanced Enhanced ES Normal — — — — Enhanced — — — — Movie — — — — Music — — — — Cinema — — — — Music — — — — Program MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 DOLBY DIGITAL DTS DGTL SUR PRO LOGIC PRO LOGIC DTS Neo: 6 DTS *1 means the DTS ES Matrix decoder is active. *2 means the DTS ES Discrete decoder is active. y • If a Dolby Digital signal or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program will be automatically switched to the Dolby Digital playback sound field or DTS playback sound field. • If Dolby Digital Surround EX software or DTS ES software is played when AUTO is selected by pressing the EX/ES button on the remote control, the Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES decoder will automatically turn on and the corresponding DSP program will be selected. • EX/ES on the remote control can be used to play Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel sources with rear center speaker. In this case the program name changes to the corresponding name for 6.1 channel. • When playing 6.1 channel source with EX/ES on the remote control off, the program name changes to the corresponding name for 5.1 channel. Note • The “ 38 ” indicator does not light up when selecting the program No. 10 except for the Enhanced mode. TUNING There are 2 ways of tuning; automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. ■ Automatic tuning 1 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin automatic tuning. Press h to tune in to a higher frequency, or press l to tune in to a lower frequency. Press the same button again if the tuning search does not stop at the desired station. PRESET/ TUNING VCR 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER TUNED CD AUTO A~~AM~1440 ~ VOLUME NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER D I G I T A L When tuned in to a station, the “TUNED” indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown on the front panel display. STANDBY /ON 6CH INPUT MODE A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING STEREO PROGRAM PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE BASS TREBLE TUNER SPEAKERS A B PROCESSOR BASS DIRECT EXTENSION MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO EDIT PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R y OPTICAL DSP PREPARATION SP A INTRODUCTION 4 Automatic and Manual Tuning EFFECT SILENT VIDEO AUX – + – + • Use the manual tuning method if the tuning search does not stop at the desired station because the signal is weak. 1 Rotate INPUT (or press TUNER on the remote control) to select TUNER as the input source. or STANDBY SLEEP 6CH INPUT A PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD 1 Select TUNER and the reception band following steps 1 and 2 described in “Automatic tuning” on left. 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off from the front panel display. TUNING MODE INPUT Front panel 2 AUTO Goes off AUTO/MAN'L MONO Remote control If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display next to the band indication, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display. PRESET /TUNING or VCR 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD TUNED EDIT Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel display. TUNING MODE AUTO Lights up AUTO/MAN'L MONO VCR 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER TUNED EDIT SP A A~~AM~1440 ~ Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune in to the desired station manually. PRESET/ TUNING Hold down the button to continue the tuning search. y • Manually tuning in to an FM station will automatically change the reception mode to monaural to increase the signal quality. APPENDIX If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display next to the band indication, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. PRESET /TUNING 3 SP A ADDITIONAL INFORMATION FM/AM 3 ADVANCED OPERATION POWER If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, you must tune in to it manually. BASIC OPERATION ■ Manual tuning 4 32 3 CD AUTO A~~AM~1440 ~ English 39 TUNING Notes Presetting Stations ■ Automatically presetting stations (for FM stations) You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations. This function enables this unit to automatically tune in to FM stations with strong signals, and to store up to 40 (8 stations x 5 groups) of those stations in order. This feature enables you to easily tune in to any preset station by selecting the preset station number (see page 41). VOLUME NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER D I G I T A L • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • When a station data is stored under a preset number, the frequency and reception band are also stored. • You can manually replace a preset station with another FM or AM station by simply following the procedure in the section “Exchanging Preset Stations” on page 42. • If the number of the received stations does not reach E8, automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after searching all stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune in to it manually in the monaural mode, and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting stations” on page 41. STANDBY /ON 6CH INPUT ■ Automatic preset tuning options MODE A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE BASS TREBLE TUNER SPEAKERS A B PROCESSOR BASS DIRECT EXTENSION MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO EDIT PHONES STEREO S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL PROGRAM DSP EFFECT SILENT VIDEO AUX – + – + 132 1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band. FM/AM 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel display. TUNING MODE AUTO Lights up AUTO/MAN'L MONO 3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for more than 3 seconds. The preset number, the “MEMORY” and “AUTO” indicators flash. Then, after about 5 seconds, automatic preset tuning begins from the frequency currently displayed toward the higher frequencies. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME AUTO MEMORY SP A A1:FM~~~~~~~~~ L R When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. 40 You can select the preset number from which this unit will store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower frequencies. 1. Repeat steps 1 and 2 in “Automatically presetting stations” on left. 2. After pressing MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for about 3 seconds, press A/B/C/D/E, then PRESET/ TUNING l / h to select the preset number under which the first station will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when stations have all been stored up to E8. 3. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon (:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning toward lower frequencies. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If so, store the stations again by using the presetting station methods. TUNING ■ Manually presetting stations 4 You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups) manually. D I G I T A L STANDBY /ON INTRODUCTION VOLUME NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a preset station number (1 to 8) while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. Press h to select a higher preset station number. Press l to select a lower preset station number. PRESET/ TUNING 6CH INPUT MODE A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING STEREO PROGRAM PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE BASS TREBLE TUNER SPEAKERS A B PROCESSOR BASS DIRECT EXTENSION MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO EDIT PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL DSP EFFECT SILENT VIDEO AUX – + – + V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 2,5 Tune in to a station. See page 39 for tuning instructions. V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER 5 CD PHONO VOLUME TUNED SP A A~ AM~~630~kHz L R DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME C3:AM~ 630~kHz L R Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the front panel while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. The station band and frequency appear on the front panel display with the preset group and number you have selected. MEMORY Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM). The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about 5 seconds. MAN'L/AUTO FM BASIC OPERATION When tuned in to a station, the front panel display shows the frequency of received station. 2 D TV/LD TUNED MEMORY SP A 1 CBL/SAT PREPARATION 3 4 MEMORY V AUX MEMORY VCR2/DVR VCR 1 SP A MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME VCR 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO C3:AM~ 630~kHz L R 6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations. Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. VOLUME ADDITIONAL INFORMATION A/B/C/D/E VCR2/DVR DVD Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3. Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. The group letter appears and make sure that the colon (:) appears on the front panel display next to the band indication. V AUX D TV/LD ADVANCED OPERATION Flashes 3 CBL/SAT TUNED MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNED MEMORY SP A C~:AM~~630~kHz L R APPENDIX English 41 TUNING Tuning in to a Preset Station Exchanging Preset Stations You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the preset station number under which it was stored. You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”. VOLUME NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER D I G I T A L VOLUME NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER STANDBY /ON 6CH INPUT MODE D I G I T A L STANDBY /ON PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE BASS TREBLE TUNER SPEAKERS A B PROCESSOR BASS DIRECT EXTENSION MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO EDIT PHONES STEREO S VIDEO VIDEO 6CH L AUDIO R INPUT MODE OPTICAL PROGRAM DSP EFFECT SILENT A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING STEREO PROGRAM PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE BASS TREBLE TUNER VIDEO AUX – – + + SPEAKERS A B PROCESSOR BASS DIRECT EXTENSION MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO EDIT PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL DSP EFFECT SILENT 1 2 LEVEL TV VOL CH TV MUTE SELECT – CH + ON SCREEN TV VOL RETURN – DISPLAY HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB STEREO 1 2 Tune in to preset station “E1” by using the A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h . See “Tuning in to a Preset Station” on left. 2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the front panel display. EFFECT 2 3 4 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER MOVIE THEATER 1 6 7 5 9 1 /DTS SUR. + 1 ROCK CONCERT 1 ENTERTAINMENT MOVIE THEATER 2 – MUTE PRESET TEST + MENU A/B/C/D/E PRESET – 1,3 1,3 2,4 SET MENU + TITLE TV INPUT VIDEO AUX SELECT 8 EX/ES 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX Press A/B/C/D/E (A/B/C/D/E on the remote control) to select the preset station group. The preset group letter appears on the front panel display and changes each time you press A/B/C/D/E. PRESET /TUNING EDIT SET MENU A/B/C/D/E or MENU A/B/C/D/E Front panel CBL/SAT VCR 1 D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO TUNED MEMORY Remote control E1:FM~87.5 MHz SP A Note • Make sure that “TUNER” mode is selected if operating using the remote control. 2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET j / i on the remote control) to select a preset station number (1 to 8). The preset group and number appear on the front panel display along with the station band, frequency and the “TUNED” indicator lights up. + PRESET/ TUNING TV VOL or CH TV MUTE SELECT – PRESET 3 Tune in to preset station “A5” by using the A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h . “A5” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the front panel display. V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD CD R TUNER CD PHONO SP A 4 A5:FM~90.6~MHz PRESET /TUNING CH + EDIT TV VOL – V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD MEMORY CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO SP A EDIT~ E1-A5~ TUNED SP A 42 E1:FM~87.5 MHz L R Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again. The stations stored at the two preset assignments are exchanged. Remote control VCR 1 VOLUME TUNED MEMORY PRESET Front panel MD/TAPE Shows the exchange of stations has been completed. BASIC RECORDING 2 VOLUME NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER D I G I T A L STANDBY /ON 6CH INPUT MODE A B PRESET/ TUNING STEREO PROGRAM PRESET /TUNING PROCESSOR BASS DIRECT EXTENSION FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE BASS TREBLE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO EDIT PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL DSP EFFECT SILENT TRANSMIT VIDEO AUX RE–NAME CLEAR – – + + LEARN SYSTEM STANDBY POWER 6CH INPUT A PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D- TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD ■ Special considerations when recording DTS software SELECT POWER POWER TV AV AMP REC Turn on the power of this unit and all connected component. 2 Select the source component you want to record from. A PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD or INPUT Remote control 3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source component. 4 Start recording on the recording component. For LDs, DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your player is compatible with the DTS format, follow its operation instruction to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player. ■ Timer playback/recording This unit can perform playback or recording with an external timer (not supplied). Refer to the operation instruction for the component and the timer to be used. Notes English Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data (input source, volume level, set menu settings and so on) from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode (disconnected from the AC outlet). However if the timer is turned off for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. APPENDIX • The stored data such as input source will be reflected in the playback or recording with the timer. • If you do not want any sound output during the recording with a timer, turn the volume down. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Front panel The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. ADVANCED OPERATION 1 BASIC OPERATION 2 SLEEP PREPARATION A/B/C/D/E TUNER SPEAKERS Notes • Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. • When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • The setting of BASS, TREBLE, BASS EXTENSION, VOLUME, “3 L/R BALANCE” on the SET MENU and DSP programs does not affect the recorded material. • A source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • S-video and composite video signals pass independently through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source component is connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal by your VCR. • A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not output on VCR 1 OUT.) • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. INTRODUCTION Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operation instructions for these components. 43 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES The remote control can operate other A/V components of YAMAHA and other manufacturers as well as this unit. To control those components, you must set up remote control with the manufacturer codes. This remote control also has a sophisticated Learn feature. The Learn feature allows it to acquire functions from the remote controls of other components in your system (or other household appliances) equipped with an infrared remote control receiver. This feature makes it possible for you to reduce the number of remote control in your entertainment room. Notes • For the operating distance of the remote control and notes about batteries, see pages 3 and 7. • For the name and function of each part and button, see pages 6 and 7. Control Area ■ Control area of this unit ■ Control area for each component The control area of this unit is the shaded area shown below. To operate this unit, press AMP to select the AMP mode. Make sure “AMP” is displayed on the remote control display window. The component control area is the shaded area shown below. Each component has different functions for the operation buttons in the component control area. The component which has been chosen by pressing an input selector button or SELECT k/n can be controlled and the display window shows the corresponding name of the component to be operated. TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP 6CH INPUT A PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD SELECT POWER POWER TV AV AMP REC AUDIO DISC SKIP + VOL – LEVEL TITLE SET MENU + TV VOL TV INPUT CH – MUTE MENU A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TEST ON SCREEN TV VOL STEREO RETURN – DISPLAY HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER MOVIE THEATER 1 5 6 7 8 EFFECT MOVIE THEATER 2 9 /DTS SUR. The buttons in the dotted lines function in any mode. A button and input selector buttons switch the control area for each component. * A button is to operate the other component (not necessarily connected to this unit) without changing this unit’s input source. Factory setting is YAMAHA LD player. TRANSMIT RE–NAME STANDBY A PHONO TUNER CD CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD SELECT SELECT k/n switch the control area for another component independently from the input selected by an input selector button. The display window will show one of the following: (when pressing n, in the reverse order when pressing k) A , PHONO, TUNER, CD, V-AUX, CBSAT, MD, CD-R, TV-LD, VCR 1, VCR 2, DVD. POWER POWER TV 12 +10 CHP/INDEX AMP AV POWER POWER REC TV AV AUDIO + DISC SKIP REC VOL AUDIO DISC SKIP LEVEL TITLE – MUTE SET MENU + MENU TV VOL TV INPUT A/B/C/D/E LEVEL CH – CH TV MUTE SELECT TV INPUT + HALL 1 ENTERTAINMENT 5 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 + MENU TV VOL A/B/C/D/E PRESET TV VOL RETURN SET MENU TITLE PRESET EX/ES 11 0 LEARN 6CH INPUT SLEEP V-AUX TEST SELECT 10 CLEAR SYSTEM POWER – CH ON SCREENTV MUTE STEREO CH – DISPLAY + SELECT PRESET EFFECT PRESET TEST ROCKON SCREEN CHURCH JAZZ CLUB CONCERT TV VOL 2 RETURN 3 – 4 DISPLAY MOVIE MUSIC TV THEATER 1 CLUB VIDEO HALLTHEATER CHURCH JAZZ 6 1 7 2 8 /DTSENTERMUSIC TV SUR.TAINMENT SELECT VIDEOEX/ES THEATER 10 0 5 11 +10 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 6 12 ROCK CONCERT 3 4 MOVIE THEATER 1 7 CHP/INDEX /DTS SUR. SELECT 8 EX/ES 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX Component control area There are 12 component control areas. You can set up the manufacturer code and program other remote control functions in each area. See pages 50 to 54. 44 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Setting the Manufacturer Code 3 The following table shows factory-set component (Library: component category) and the manufacturer code for each area. Manufacturer A LD Yamaha PHONO TV – TUNER TUNER Yamaha CH – CD CD Yamaha V-AUX VCR – CABLE – MD Yamaha CD-R CD-R Yamaha D-TV/LD TV – VCR 1 VCR – VCR 2/DVR VCR – DVD DVD Yamaha Note – If you want to change a library (component category), press j / i. You can set a different component from the input selector name. Library choices: L:DVD, L:LD, L:CD, L:CD-R, L:MD, L:TAP, L:TUN, L:AMP*, L:TV, L:CAB, L:DBS, L:SAT, L:VCR (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) *L:AMP (AMP Library) AMP Library has 2 codes: YPC (code to operate this unit) and ZONE 2. 4 TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD POWER POWER TV AV AMP ADDITIONAL INFORMATION PHONO Press one of the buttons shaded below to check if it works for the component being set. If it does, the manufacturer code setting has been correctly made. If the manufacturer of your component has more than one codes, try each of them until you find the correct one as checking if it works following step 4. REC AUDIO DISC SKIP + VOL – 2 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “SETUP” and the selected component name appear alternately in the display window. LEVEL TITLE TV INPUT SET MENU + TV VOL ADVANCED OPERATION Press an input selector button or A to select the component you want to set up. A + BASIC OPERATION CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CH PRESET TV VOL • You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if Yamaha manufacture code is initially set as listed above. In this case, try to set other Yamaha manufacture code(s). 1 TV MUTE SELECT PRESET PREPARATION Component category (Library) Input area + TV VOL INTRODUCTION You can control other components by setting a manufacturer code. A code can be set up in each component control area. Press u / d to select the name of your component’s manufacturer. You will find the names of most worldwide audiovideo manufacturers in alphabetical order in the display window. MUTE MENU A/B/C/D/E y LEARN APPENDIX • If you continuously want to set up another code for another component, press TV MUTE/SELECT and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4. Notes English • Press LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning process is started. • If you do not press any button within 30 seconds during step 3, the setup process is canceled. If this happens, start over from step 2. 45 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 5 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup mode. LEARN Notes • Supplied remote control does not store all the manufacturer codes for commercially availabvle AV components (including Yamaha AV components). Therefore it may not work to operate your AV component. If operation is not possible with any of the manfacturer codes, program the new remote control function with the Learn feature (see page 47) or use the remote control for the component. • If you have already programmed a remote control function for a button, the function by learning programming takes priority over the setup manufacturer code’s function. • “ERROR” appears in the display window when pressing buttons other than indicated in each step, or more than one button at once. 46 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 4 Learn Feature INTRODUCTION CD 6CH INPUT LEARN SLEEP CLEAR TUNER RE–NAME STANDBY TRANSMIT PHONO DVD CD-R A MD/TAPE SYSTEM VCR2/DVR POWER VCR 1 CBL/SAT AMP SELECT V-AUX POWER + – VOL D-TV/LD POWER AV AUDIO TV REC DISC SKIP If you want to program functions not included in the basic operations covered by the manufacturer code, or a manufacturer code is not available, the following procedure needs to be performed. The possible programming area is the same as a component control area, so the buttons are programmable independently for each source component area. Press the button for which you want to program the new function. “LEARN” is displayed. Note 5 ■ Programming a new remote control function Press and hold the button on the other remote control that has the function you want to program into this remote control until “OK” appears in the display window. TRANSMIT BASIC OPERATION RE–NAME CLEAR LEARN CD 6CH INPUT Notes • “NG” appears in the display window when programming has not been done correctly. In this case, start over from step 4. • This remote control can learn approximately 120 functions. However depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may appear in the display window much earlier than this number. In this case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make further learning on the remote control. LEARN Repeat steps 4 and 5 to program additional functions. 7 Press LEARN again to exit from the learning mode. LEARN 3 LEARN • Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Otherwise, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. • Do not press and hold LEARN longer than 3 seconds. Otherwise this unit enters the manufacturer code setting mode. 47 English Flashes alternately Notes Notes • Learning may not be possibe in the following cases: – when the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other components are weak – when the distance between the two remote controls is too much or too little – when the remote control infrared windows are not facing at the appropriate angle – when the remote control is exposed to the direct sunlight – when the function to be programmed is continuous or uncommon • “ERROR” appears in the display window when pressing buttons other than indicated in each step. APPENDIX Press LEARN by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. Do not press and hold LEARN longer than three seconds. Otherwise this unit enters the manufacturer code setting mode. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION CLEAR 6 ADVANCED OPERATION RE–NAME SLEEP TRANSMIT TUNER DVD CD-R SYSTEM STANDBY MD/TAPE CD PHONO VCR2/DVR 6CH INPUT A POWER VCR 1 CBL/SAT AMP SELECT V-AUX AV POWER D-TV/LD TV POWER 1 to 4 cm (approximately 1 inch) SLEEP Place this remote control and the other remote control 1 to 4 cm apart on a flat surface so that their infrared transmitters are aimed at each other. TUNER 2 STANDBY DVD PHONO CD-R VCR2/DVR A MD/TAPE VCR 1 SYSTEM CBL/SAT POWER V-AUX D-TV/LD DVD CD CD-R TUNER MD/TAPE PHONO VCR2/DVR A AMP 6CH INPUT SELECT SLEEP VCR 1 AV STANDBY POWER SYSTEM POWER CBL/SAT to V-AUX A D-TV/LD TV Press an input selector button or select a source component. POWER 1 PREPARATION • This remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most of the other remote control’s functions. However, you may not be able to program some special signals or extremely long transmissions. (Refer to the operation instructions for the other remote control.) REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Clearing a new remote control function You can clear the function learned in a certain programmable button in each area. 1 Press an input selector button or A to select the source component you want to do “One Button Clear”. The selected component name appears in the display window. Changing the Source Name in the Display Window You can change the name that appears in the display window on the remote control if you want to use the different name from the original input selector button names. This is useful when different component is set in the input selector button. 1 Press an input selector button or A to select the source component you want to rename. The selected component name appears in the display window. SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP 6CH INPUT A PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD SYSTEM POWER 2 Press LEARN by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “LEARN” and the selected component name appear alternately in the display window. 2 3 A PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD Note + TV VOL CH TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR – SLEEP 6CH INPUT A PHONO TUNER CD CH + PRESET TV VOL – 4 SYSTEM STANDBY TV MUTE SELECT PRESET LEARN POWER RE-NAME Press u / d to select and enter a character. Pressing d changes the character in the following order: A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, space, - (hyphen) and / (slash). (Pressing u goes in the reverse order.) • Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Otherwise the clearing mode will be canceled. In this case press LEARN again. Press the button that you want to clear for 3 seconds as pressing CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “C:OK” appears in the display window. 6CH INPUT SLEEP Press RE-NAME by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. LEARN 3 STANDBY Press j / i to move the cursor to the next position. Repeat step 3 and 4 until the new name is completed. + TV VOL V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R CH D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR – DVD TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TV VOL – Note y • If “NG” appears on the display window, clearing has not been done correctly. Press and hold CLEAR again, then press the button to be cleared its programmed function. y • If you continuously want to rename another source component, press TV MUTE/SELECT and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4. 5 Press RE-NAME again to exit from the renaming mode. • If you continuousuly want to clear another button, press and hold CLEAR, then press the button to be cleared. 4 Press LEARN again to exit from the learning mode. LEARN Note • “ERROR” appears in the display window when pressing buttons other than indicated in each step. 48 RE-NAME Note • “ERROR” appears in the display window when pressing buttons other than indicated in each step, or more than one button at once. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 3 You can clear learned functions, renamed source names and set up manufacture codes. You can also revert the remote control to the factory setting. 1 Press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3 seconds. “C:OK” appears in the display window. INTRODUCTION Clearing Learned Functions, Renamed Source Names, and Setup Manufacturer Codes CLEAR Note 4 Press CLEAR to exit from the clearing mode. Note CLEAR • If you do not press any button within 30 seconds during steps 2 and 3, the clearing process is canceled. If this happen, start over from step 1. 2 Note • “ERROR” appears in the display window when pressing buttons other than indicated in each step, or more than one button at once. BASIC OPERATION Press u / d to select the clear mode. The mode is shown in the display window in the following order: + TV VOL CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET PREPARATION • “C:NG” appears in the display window if the operation is unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2. CLEAR CH + PRESET TV VOL – ADVANCED OPERATION (L: name of a component) Clears all learned functions for the component area. Clears all learned functions for this unit control area. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Clears all learned functions. Clears all renamed source names in the display window. APPENDIX Clears all programmed functions including setup manufacturer codes. This returns to the factory settings. English 49 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Each Component Control Area The general operational buttons are shown for each area. Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. After setting the manufacturer code, press an input selector button or A , or SELECT k / n to select a component you want to control. ■ Operating a DVD player (DVD area) ■ Operating a VCR (VCR 1 and VCR 2/DVR areas) LEARN TRANSMIT POWER STANDBY SLEEP 6CH INPUT POWER A PHONO TUNER CD A PHONO TUNER CD CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR RE–NAME CLEAR V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R V-AUX D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD D-TV/LD STANDBY SLEEP POWER POWER TV AV AUDIO Power AUDIO + VOL – LEVEL TITLE SET MENU + TV VOL TV INPUT CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET + STEREO Up/down, left/ right and SELECT DISPLAY Power REC AUDIO DISC SKIP + VOL Play Search backward MENU CH AMP – LEVEL SET MENU + TV VOL MUTE * CH – VCR Channel up/down TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TEST ON SCREEN TV VOL RETURN – DISPLAY DISPLAY STEREO EFFECT ROCK CONCERT CHURCH JAZZ CLUB HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER MOVIE THEATER 1 ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER MOVIE THEATER 1 5 6 7 8 SELECT EX/ES 9 6 /DTS SUR. 7 8 SELECT EX/ES 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX Numeric buttons MOVIE THEATER 2 Title/index * TV POWER functions to turn on and off your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in both D-TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV/LD area. Search forward MENU HALL 5 Stop A/B/C/D/E ROCK CONCERT MOVIE THEATER 2 50 AV TITLE EFFECT Numeric buttons TV TV INPUT ON SCREEN – POWER MENU TV VOL RETURN MUTE Skip forward Play Search forward * Pause Record POWER A/B/C/D/E PRESET TEST RETURN AMP REC DISC SKIP 6CH INPUT SELECT SELECT * Pause DISC SKIP (DVD changer) Skip backward Search backward Stop Title LEARN SYSTEM SYSTEM 9 /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX Enter * TV POWER, TV INPUT, TV volume +/–, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in both D-TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/LD area. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Operating a TV/digital TV (D-TV/ LD area) or a cable TV/satellite TV (CBL/SAT area) RE–NAME CLEAR TRANSMIT LEARN RE–NAME CLEAR POWER STANDBY SLEEP 6CH INPUT A PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD POWER STANDBY SLEEP A PHONO TUNER CD CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD SELECT POWER TV AV AMP (Power) REC (Record) AUDIO DISC SKIP + – LEVEL TITLE – TV MUTE SELECT MUTE TITLE * + ON SCREEN – SET MENU + TV VOL TV INPUT Volume up/down CH – TV MUTE SELECT DISPLAY HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER MOVIE THEATER 1 MENU CH + ON SCREEN TV VOL – 5 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 6 /DTS SUR. 7 8 SELECT EX/ES 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX STEREO Display DISPLAY EFFECT EFFECT Numeric buttons MUTE PRESET TEST RETURN – Power Sound Play Skip forward Search forward A/B/C/D/E PRESET STEREO + VOL LEVEL CH TV VOL RETURN (Search forward) AMP REC DISC SKIP PRESET TEST AV Skip backward Stop Search backward MENU A/B/C/D/E PRESET TV BASIC OPERATION CH TV MUTE SET MENU + TV VOL TV INPUT POWER AUDIO VOL (Play) (Search backward) * Pause POWER Numeric buttons Enter/12 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER MOVIE THEATER 1 5 6 7 8 SELECT EX/ES 9 /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX Chapter/time Set the manufacture code for your LD player following the setting procedure described on page 45 because TV is factory-set for this input selector button. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION * TV POWER, TV INPUT, TV channel +/–, TV volume +/– and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in PHONO. ADVANCED OPERATION The buttons in parentheses above (AV POWER, REC, d, w, e/r, a) function to operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR 1 if the manufacturer code is set in VCR 1. ROCK CONCERT HALL MOVIE THEATER 2 PREPARATION POWER 6CH INPUT V-AUX SELECT TV INPUT Channel up/down LEARN SYSTEM SYSTEM POWER (Pause) INTRODUCTION TRANSMIT ■ Operating an LD player (D-TV/LD area) APPENDIX English 51 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Operating a CD player (CD area) ■ Operating a CD recorder (CD-R area) or an MD recorder (MD/ TAPE area) LEARN TRANSMIT POWER STANDBY SLEEP 6CH INPUT POWER A PHONO TUNER CD A PHONO TUNER CD CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR RE–NAME CLEAR V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R V-AUX D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD D-TV/LD STANDBY SLEEP POWER POWER TV AV * Power AUDIO DISC SKIP + VOL – LEVEL TITLE SET MENU + TV VOL TV INPUT * AMP REC CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET TEST TV AV AUDIO DISC SKIP – LEVEL TITLE * CH + STEREO Display CH – SET MENU + TV VOL TV MUTE SELECT CH + ON SCREEN TV VOL – ROCK CONCERT CHURCH JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER MOVIE THEATER 1 ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER MOVIE THEATER 1 6 7 8 SELECT EX/ES 5 9 6 /DTS SUR. Numeric buttons 7 8 5 SELECT EX/ES MOVIE THEATER 2 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX Display EFFECT HALL MOVIE THEATER 2 Index * TV POWER, TV INPUT, TV channel +/–, TV volume +/– and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in both D-TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV/LD area. 52 STEREO DISPLAY EFFECT Numeric buttons Skip forward Play Search forward Stop MENU PRESET TEST RETURN MUTE Power Pause A/B/C/D/E PRESET DISPLAY + VOL Search backward MUTE AMP REC TV INPUT ON SCREEN – Search forward POWER MENU TV VOL RETURN Play Skip forward Record (MD recorder only) Skip backward POWER A/B/C/D/E PRESET 6CH INPUT SELECT SELECT * Pause DISC SKIP (CD changer) Skip backward Search backward LEARN SYSTEM SYSTEM 9 /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX Index * TV POWER, TV INPUT, TV channel +/–, TV volume +/– and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in both D-TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV/LD area. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Operating a tape deck (MD/TAPE area) RE–NAME CLEAR LEARN TRANSMIT 6CH INPUT POWER SYSTEM POWER RE–NAME CLEAR SLEEP STANDBY SLEEP A PHONO TUNER CD A PHONO TUNER CD CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD POWER TV AV AUDIO + VOL – Search backward LEVEL TITLE SET MENU + TV VOL CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET MUTE Power A/B Play Direction B Search forward Stop * POWER TV AV – LEVEL TITLE TV INPUT ON SCREEN TV VOL + VOL MENU Preset down + Power AUDIO A/B/C/D/E CH AMP REC DISC SKIP PRESET TEST POWER CH – SET MENU + TV VOL MENU A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE SELECT PRESET STEREO MUTE A/B/C/D/E CH Preset up + PRESET TEST ON SCREEN TV VOL STEREO RETURN – DISPLAY RETURN – DISPLAY HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER MOVIE THEATER 1 ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER MOVIE THEATER 1 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 SELECT EX/ES MOVIE THEATER 2 SELECT EX/ES EFFECT MOVIE THEATER 2 9 /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX BASIC OPERATION TV INPUT SELECT AMP REC PREPARATION POWER Direction A Numeric buttons 6CH INPUT V-AUX DISC SKIP * LEARN SYSTEM STANDBY SELECT * Pause Record INTRODUCTION TRANSMIT ■ Operating a tuner (TUNER area) EFFECT Preset stations Index 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX ADDITIONAL INFORMATION * TV POWER functions to turn on and off your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in both D-TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV/LD area. ADVANCED OPERATION * TV POWER, TV INPUT, TV channel +/–, TV volume +/– and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in both D-TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV/LD area. 9 /DTS SUR. ROCK CONCERT APPENDIX English 53 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Operating the component set in A This button is not an input selector button but simply provides the space for an extra component (not necessarily connected to this unit) to control with this unit’s remote control without changing this unit’s input source. The white area shown below can be used for the component set in A and the function for each button differs depending on the component. YAMAHA LD player is factory-set in A . However if you want to set other component, set the manufacturer code for the component you want to set in the A button following the manufacturer code setting procedure described on page 45. TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM TV POWER functions to turn on and off your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in both D-TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/ LD area. POWER STANDBY SLEEP 6CH INPUT A PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD SELECT POWER POWER TV AV REC AUDIO DISC SKIP – LEVEL TITLE SET MENU + TV VOL TV INPUT – MUTE MENU A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TEST ON SCREEN TV VOL STEREO RETURN – DISPLAY HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER MOVIE THEATER 1 EFFECT 5 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 54 + VOL CH The functions of these buttons in the component control area differ for the component you set in A . AMP 6 ROCK CONCERT 7 8 SELECT EX/ES 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX /DTS SUR. ADVANCED OPERATION SET MENU y Adjustment should be made with the remote control. Adjustment procedures are explained using SET MENU 2 LOW FRQ TEST as an example. TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR REC STANDBY SLEEP 6CH INPUT A PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD AUDIO DISC SKIP Note – TITLE SET MENU + TV VOL CH TV MUTE SELECT – PRESET CH + ON SCREEN TV VOL 1 SPEAKER SET POWER TV AV RETURN – DISPLAY HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB AMP 2 3,6 PRESET TEST POWER MUTE MENU A/B/C/D/E TV INPUT SELECT + VOL LEVEL • The indication on the front panel display is the abbreviation of the OSD. 1 LEARN SYSTEM POWER PREPARATION • You can adjust the items on the SET MENU while playing a source. • We recommend that you adjust the items on the SET MENU while using a video monitor. It is easier to see the video monitor than it is to see the front panel display on this unit while adjusting the items. Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU STEREO EFFECT ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER MOVIE THEATER 1 4,5 REC 5 6 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 7 8 SELECT EX/ES 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX /DTS SUR. BASIC OPERATION 1A CENTER SP 1B MAIN SP 1C REAR L/R SP 1 Press AMP to select the AMP mode. AMP appears in the display window on the remote control. 2 Press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU. 1D REAR CT SP 1E LFE/BASS OUT 1F MAIN LEVEL AMP SET MENU 1/4 SET MENU LOW FRQ TEST ≥ 1 2 3 4 MENU L/R BALANCE 4 HP TONE CTRL 5 CENTER GEQ 6 INPUT RENAME 7 I/O ASSIGNMENT A/B/C/D/E 3 Press u/d repeatedly to select the item (1 to 15) you want to adjust. + SET MENU 1/4 TV VOL 7A CMPNT-V INPUT 7B OPTICAL OUT SPEAKER SET LOW FRQ TEST L/R BALANCE HP TONE CTRL / : Up/Down -/+ : Enter CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET 7C OPTICAL IN CH + PRESET TV VOL 1 ≥ 2 3 4 SPEAKER SET LOW FRQ TEST L/R BALANCE HP TONE CTRL / : Up/Down -/+ : Enter ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 3 ADVANCED OPERATION 1G SP B SET 2 INTRODUCTION The SET MENU consists of 15 items including the speaker mode setting, center graphic equalizer and parameter initialization features. Choose the appropriate item and adjust or select the values as necessary. – 7D COAXIAL IN y INPUT MODE 9 PARAM. INI 10 LFE LEVEL 11 D-RANGE 12 SP DELAY • By pressing SET MENU repeatedly, you can select items in the same order as when pressing d. Note • If u is pressed when SET MENU 1 is selected, and if d is pressed when SET MENU 15 is selected, SET MENU will be closed. Press SET MENU to open SET MENU again. English 13 DISPLAY SET APPENDIX 8 14 MEMORY GUARD 15 6CH INPUT SET 55 SET MENU 4 Press j / i once to enter the setup mode of the selected item. The last setting you adjusted appears on the video monitor or on the front panel display. + 2 LOW FRQ TEST TV VOL CH TV MUTE SELECT – PRESET ≥ TEST TONE………OFF OUTPUT…MAIN L/R FRQ……………………88Hz CH + PRESET TV VOL – Depending on the item, press u/d to select a sub item. + 2 LOW FRQ TEST TV VOL CH PRESET TEST TONE………OFF ≥ OUTPUT…MAIN L/R FRQ……………………88Hz CH TV MUTE SELECT – + PRESET TV VOL – 5 Press j / i repeatedly to change the setting of the item. + 2 LOW FRQ TEST TV VOL CH ≥ TEST TONE…………ON OUTPUT…MAIN L/R FRQ……………………88Hz CH TV MUTE SELECT – + PRESET PRESET TV VOL – 6 Press u/d repeatedly until the menu disappears or simply press one of the DSP program group button to exit from the SET MENU. + TV VOL CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET or CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER MOVIE THEATER 1 5 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 TV VOL – ROCK CONCERT HALL 7 8 SELECT EX/ES 10 6 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX /DTS SUR. 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your speaker configuration. Notes • When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, level adjustments in items 1B,1E and 1F are possible, but those in items 1A,1C and 1D are not affected. • When 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source, level adjustments in items 1A through 1E are not affected. y • Select SML if the woofer diameter of you speaker is smaller than 16 cm. If it is larger than 16 cm, select LRG. ■ 1A CENTER SP (center speaker mode) By adding a center speaker to your speaker configuration, this unit can provide good dialog localization for many listeners and superior synchronization of sound and images. The OSD shows a large, small or no center speaker depending on how you set this item. Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE Initial setting: LRG LRG Select this if you have a large center speaker. The entire range of the center channel signal is directed to the center speaker. 1A CENTER SP LRG SML NONE SML Select this if you have a small center speaker. The lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E LFE/BASS OUT”. 1A CENTER SP Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the items again. LRG SML NONE NONE Select this if you do not have a center speaker. All of the center channel signal are directed to the left and right main speakers. 1A CENTER SP LRG SML NONE 56 SET MENU ■ 1B MAIN SP (main speaker mode) The OSD shows large or small main speakers depending on how you set this item. LARGE Select this if you have large main speakers. The entire range of the left and right main channel signal is directed to the left and right main speakers. 1B MAIN SP The OSD shows large, small or no rear speakers depending on how you set this item. Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE Initial setting: LRG 1C REAR L/R SP LARGE SMALL 1B MAIN SP LRG SML NONE SML Select this if you have small left and right rear speakers. The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E LFE/BASS OUT”. 1C REAR L/R SP BASIC OPERATION SMALL Select this if you have small main speakers. The lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E LFE/BASS OUT”. PREPARATION LRG Select this if you have large left and right rear speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the left and right rear speakers. INTRODUCTION Choices: LARGE, SMALL Initial setting: LARGE ■ 1C REAR L/R SP (rear speaker mode) LARGE SMALL ADVANCED OPERATION Note • When you select MAIN for “1E LFE/BASS OUT”, the lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the main speakers even if you select SMALL for the main speaker mode. LRG SML NONE NONE Select this if you do not have rear speakers. 1C REAR L/R SP ADDITIONAL INFORMATION LRG SML NONE Note • If “1C REAR L/R SP” is set to NONE, “1D REAR CT SP” will be skipped. y APPENDIX • This unit is set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode by selecting NONE for “1C REAR L/R SP” (see page 32). English 57 SET MENU ■ 1D REAR CT SP (rear center speaker mode) ■ 1E LFE/BASS OUT (bass out mode) By adding a rear center speaker to your speaker configuration, this unit can provide more realistic frontto-back and transitions. The initial setting is “LRG”. LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency signals are defined as 90 Hz and below. The Lowfrequency signals are directed to both main right and left speakers, and the subwoofer (subwoofer can be used for both stereo reproduction and the DSP program). Note • If “1C REAR L/R SP” is set to NONE, “1D REAR CT SP” will be skipped. Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE Initial setting: LRG LRG Select this if you have a large rear center speaker. The entire range of the rear center channel signal is directed to the rear center speaker. Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH Initial setting: BOTH SWFR Select this if you use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the subwoofer. 1E LFE/BASS OUT 1D REAR CT SP SWFR MAIN BOTH LRG SML NONE SML Select this if you have a small rear center speaker. The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear center channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E LFE/BASS OUT”. MAIN Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the main speakers. 1E LFE/BASS OUT 1D REAR CT SP LRG SML NONE NONE Select this if you do not have a rear center speaker. All of the rear center channel signal are directed to the left and right rear speakers. SWFR MAIN BOTH BOTH Select this if you use a subwoofer and you want to mix the main channel low-frequency signals with the LFE signals. LFE signals for the main L/R speakers are output from both L/R speakers and subwoofer. 1E LFE/BASS OUT 1D REAR CT SP SWFR MAIN BOTH LRG SML NONE Note • The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) from all main, center, rear and rear center channels are directed to the LFE channel when you select the small speaker setting in items 1A, 1B, 1C and 1D. 58 SET MENU ■ 1F MAIN LEVEL (main level mode) Choices: Normal, –10 dB Initial setting: Normal PREPARATION Normal Select this if you can match the output level of your effect speakers with that of your main speakers when using the test tone. 1G SP B SET MAIN “ZONE B 1F MAIN LEVEL -/+ : Select / : Exit Normal -10dB 1F MAIN LEVEL 2 LOW FRQ TEST Use this feature to adjust the output level of the subwoofer so it matches that of the other speakers in your configuration. Change the setting with the remote control while sitting in the listening position. 1 2 LOW FRQ TEST ≥ TEST TONE…………ON OUTPUT…MAIN L/R FRQ……………………88Hz ■ 1G SP B SET (speaker B set) Use this feature to select the location of the main speakers to be connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. MAIN Select this to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in the main room. 1G SP B SET “MAIN ZONE B 2 Press d to go to “OUTPUT” and press j / i to select the speaker you want to compare with the subwoofer. If SWFR is selected, the test tone above 90 Hz will not be output from the subwoofer. The test tone will not necessarily be output from the selected speakers. The output mode of the test tone depends on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” on the SET MENU. APPENDIX -/+ : Select / : Exit Notes • Do not turn up the volume too high. • If no test tone is heard, turn down the volume, set this unit in the standby mode and make sure all the necessary connections are correct. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Choices: MAIN, ZONE B Initial setting: MAIN ADVANCED OPERATION -10dB Press j / i to set “TEST TONE” to ON, and adjust the volume with VOL +/– so you can hear the tone. BASIC OPERATION –10 dB Select this if you cannot match the output level of your effect speakers with that of your main speakers when using the test tone. Normal INTRODUCTION Change this setting if you cannot match the output level of the center, rear (L/R) and rear center speakers with the main speakers because of the unusually high-efficiency performance of the main speakers. ZONE B Select this if the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in the second room. If SPEAKERS A is turned OFF and SPEAKERS B is turned ON, all the effect speakers in the main room are muted and the sound is output only from SPEAKERS B. When a DSP program is selected, this unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode. If the headphones are connected to PHONES jack on this unit in the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode, this unit enters the SILENT CINEMA DSP mode and the sound is output from both headphones and SPEAKERS B. 2 LOW FRQ TEST TEST TONE………OFF ≥ OUTPUT…MAIN L/R FRQ……………………88Hz English 59 SET MENU 3 Press d to go to “FRQ” and press j / i to select the frequency you want to use. 2 LOW FRQ TEST TEST TONE………OFF OUTPUT…MAIN L/R ≥ FRQ……………………88Hz 4 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble when you use your headphones. Control range (dB): –6 to +3 for both BASS and TRBL (treble) Initial setting: 0 dB for both BASS and TRBL (treble) 4 Adjust the volume of the subwoofer with the controls on the subwoofer so it matches that of the speaker you are comparing it to. 4 HP TONE CTRL ≥ BASS TRBL + - 0dB ■ About the test tone The test tone is produced by the tone generator. The tone generator produces a narrow-band noise centered on a specified frequency by the band pass filter besides a wide-band noise. You can change this center frequency from 35 Hz through 250 Hz in one-sixth octave steps. You can use the test tone not only for adjusting the subwoofer level, but also for checking the low-frequency characteristics of your listening room. Low-frequency sounds are especially affected by the listener’s position, speaker placement, subwoofer polarity and other conditions. Digital generator (wide band noise produced) 5 CENTER GEQ (center graphic equalizer) Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-band graphic equalizer so that the center speaker tonal quality matches that of the left and right main speakers. You can select the 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, or 10 kHz frequencies. Control range (dB): –6 to +6 Initial setting: 0 dB for 5-band 1 Press d to select a higher frequency and u to select a lower frequency. 5 CENTER GEQ Noise ≥ 100Hz 300Hz 1kHz 3kHz 10kHz Freq. - Center freq. 35 Hz – 250 Hz 2 Band pass filter Control range: 10 steps for L/R Initial setting: 0 dB for L/R Press i to decrease the output level for the left main speaker. Press j for the right main speaker. 3 L/R BALANCE L …………………… ……………………R 0 -/+ : Adjust / : Exit 60 + Press j / i to adjust the level of that frequency. 5 CENTER GEQ 100Hz ≥ 300Hz 1kHz 3kHz 10kHz 3 L/R BALANCE (balance of the left and right main speakers) Use this feature to adjust the balance of the output level from the left and right main speakers. 0dB - +3dB + y • You can monitor the center speaker sound while adjusting this item by using the test tone. Press TEST before starting the foregoing procedure. “TEST DOLBY SUR.” appears on the video monitor, and the test tone starts alternating among the speakers. Once you begin this procedure, the test tone remains at the center speaker and you can hear how the sound changes as you adjust the various frequency levels. To stop the test tone, press TEST (see pages 25 and 26). SET MENU 6 INPUT RENAME 7 I/O ASSIGNMENT 1 Press an input selector button (or use INPUT) to select the input you want to change the name of. 6 INPUT RENAME DVD ≥ DVD It is possible to assign jacks according to the component to be used if this unit’s COMPONENT VIDEO input jack or DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jack settings (component names for jacks) differ from that component. This makes it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively connect more component. Once you assign, you can select that component with INPUT (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). Press AMP to select the AMP mode. 3 Press j / i to place the _ (under-bar) under the space or the character you want to edit. AMP Choices: [A] DVD, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD [B] CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1 Initial settings: [A] DVD [B] CBL/SAT 7A CMPNT-V INPUT 6 INPUT RENAME DVD ≥ ≥ [A]…………… DVD [B]……………CBL/SAT DVD BASIC OPERATION 2 PREPARATION ■ 7A CMPNT-V INPUT for COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT jacks [A] and [B] -/+ : Position / : Character INTRODUCTION Use this feature to change the name of the input which appears on the OSD or the front panel display. -/+ : Position / : Character 6 INPUT RENAME DVD ≥ DVD1 Choices: (1) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/ SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD (2) CD-R, CD, PHONO, V-AUX, VCR 2/ DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/TAPE Initial settings: (1) MD/TAPE (2) CD-R 7B OPTICAL OUT ≥ (1)……………MD/TAPE (2)…………… CD-R -/+ : Position / : Character APPENDIX Note • You can use up to 8 characters to rename the inputs. 5 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Press u/d to select the character you want to use and j / i to move to the next one. • Press d to change the character in the following order, or press u to go in the reverse order. A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, #, *, +, and so on. • Follow the foregoing procedure to rename other inputs. ADVANCED OPERATION 4 ■ 7B OPTICAL OUT for OPTICAL OUTPUT jacks (1) and (2) Press i repeatedly to exit from INPUT RENAME. English 61 SET MENU ■ 7C OPTICAL IN for OPTICAL INPUT jacks (3) to (6) Choices: (3) CD, PHONO, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/ TAPE, CD-R (4) CD-R, CD, PHONO, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/TAPE (5) DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/ SAT, D-TV/LD (6) CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/ TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, VCR 2/ DVR, VCR 1 Initial settings: (3) CD (4) CD-R (5) DVD (6) CBL/SAT 7C OPTICAL IN (3)…………… CD (4)…………… CD-R ≥ (5)…………… DVD (6)……………CBL/SAT ■ 7D COAXIAL IN for COAXIAL INPUT jacks (7) and (8) Choices: (7) CD, PHONO, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R (8) D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT Initial settings: (7) CD (8) D-TV/LD 7D COAXIAL IN (7)……… CD ≥ (8)………D-TV/LD Note • You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of jack. 62 8 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on this unit (see page 29 for details about the input mode). 8 INPUT MODE AUTO LAST -/+ : Select / : Exit Choices: AUTO, LAST Initial setting: AUTO AUTO Select this to allow this unit to automatically detect the type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode. LAST Select this to set this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for that source. SET MENU 9 PARAM. INI (parameter initialization) 2 Press j / i to adjust the LFE level. Press the corresponding numeric button for the DSP program that you want to initialize. The asterisk (*) next to the program number means that the parameter values have been changed. INTRODUCTION 10 LFE LEVEL Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each DSP program within a DSP program group. When you initialize a DSP program group, all of the parameter values within that group revert to their initial settings. ≥ SPEAKER…………-11dB HEADPHONE…………0dB Note 9 PARAM. INI 1 2 3 *4 *5 6 7 8 9 *10 Press No. Key 11 D-RANGE 10 LFE LEVEL This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. Choices: MAX, STD, MIN Initial setting: MAX (for both speakers and headphones) MAX Select the “MAX” setting for feature films. STD Select the “STD” (Standard) setting for general use. MIN Select the “MIN” setting for listening to sources at extremely low volume levels. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. The LFE signal carries the low-frequency special effect sound which is only added to certain scenes. Control range (dB): –20 to 0 for both SPEAKER and HEADPHONE Initial setting: 0 dB for both SPEAKER and HEADPHONE ≥ SP: MAX STD MIN HP: MAX STD MIN ADVANCED OPERATION • You cannot initialize the individual DSP programs within a group separately. • The parameter values of the DSP programs do not change if you initialize a program group that does not have the asterisk mark (*). • When “14 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON (see page 65), you cannot initialize any program groups. • Once you initialize a DSP program group, you cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter settings. Press d/u to select the item to be adjusted. APPENDIX 1 Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital signals. BASIC OPERATION Notes 11 D-RANGE (dynamic range) PREPARATION • Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. 10 LFE LEVEL ≥ SPEAKER………………0dB HEADPHONE…………0dB English 63 SET MENU ■ Setting by “msec” 12 SP DELAY Control range: Use this feature to adjust the delay of the Center and the Rear Center channel sounds. This feature works when there is sound output from the center speakers with a source like Dolby Digital or DTS, etc. Ideally, the Center speaker and the Rear Center speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position as the left and right Main speakers. However, in most home situations, the Center speaker or the Rear Center speaker is placed in line with the Main speakers or the Rear speakers. By delaying the sound from the Center speaker and the Rear Center speaker, the apparent distance from the Center speaker and the Rear Center speaker to the main listening position can be adjusted to make it seem the same as the distance between the left and right Main speaker, and the left and right Rear speakers to the listening position. Adjusting the delay time for the Center speaker is especially important for giving depth to the dialogue. 1 2 Press j / i to select the unit to be used for setting. Select one from “msec”, “meters”, and “feet”. Control range: Initial settings: 12 SP DELAY ■ Setting by “feet” Initial settings: Center speaker image C L RL C R RC RR RC 0.5 to 100 ft (for main L/R, center, rear L/R, rear center) 10.0 ft (for main L/R, center, rear L/ R), 7.0 ft (for rear center) 12 SP DELAY ≥ UNIT……………………feet MAIN L/R……10.0ft CENTER…………10.0ft REAR L/R……10.0ft REAR CT…………7.0ft Press j / i to set the delay. Press i for higher value and j for lower value. 12 SP DELAY 0.15 to 30.00 m (for main L/R, center, rear L/R, rear center) 3.00 m (for main L/R, center, rear L/ R), 2.10 m (for rear center) ≥ UNIT………………meters MAIN L/R………3.00m CENTER……………3.00m REAR L/R………3.00m REAR CT…………2.10m Press u/d to select the speaker for which the delay is adjusted. ≥ UNIT……………………msec CENTER……………0.0ms REAR CT…………3.0ms 64 ■ Setting by “meters” Control range: • Setting items change depending on the unit chosen. • When “meters” or “feet” is selected, enter the distance from your listening position to each speaker. 4 12 SP DELAY ≥ UNIT……………………msec CENTER……………0.0ms REAR CT…………3.0ms Press u/d to select “UNIT”. Notes 3 Initial settings: 0 to 5.0 ms (for center), 0 to 30.0 ms (for rear center) 0 ms (for center), 3.0 ms (for rear center) Note • No delay will be set if the same distance is set for the main L/R and center, or the rear L/R and rear center with “meters” or “feet” selected. SET MENU 13 DISPLAY SET 15 6CH INPUT SET ≥ DIMMER………………………0 OSD SHIFT………………0 GRAY BACK………AUTO Use this feature to set the direction of the signals input into the center and subwoofer channels when the source component is connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. ■ 15A CENTER to (direction of the center channel signals) This item sets the direction of the signals input into the CENTER jack. ■ DIMMER You can adjust the brightness of the front panel display. ■ OSD SHIFT (OSD off-set position) This setting is used to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Press i to lower the position of the OSD. Press j to raise the position of the OSD. ■ GRAY BACK Choices: AUTO, OFF Initial setting: AUTO CENTER MAIN CENTER The input signals are output from the center speaker. MAIN The input signals are directed to the main L/R speakers with same level. ■ 15B SWFR to (direction of the signals input into the subwoofer) This item sets the direction of the signals input into the SUBWOOFER jack. Choices: SWFR, MAIN Initial setting: SWFR 14 MEMORY GUARD 15B SWFR to ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other settings on this unit. SWFR MAIN Choices: ON, OFF Initial setting: OFF 14 MEMORY GUARD O FF ADVANCED OPERATION Selecting AUTO for the on-screen display setting displays a gray background when there’s no video signal input. Nothing is displayed on the screen including the onscreen display if OFF is selected. 15A CENTER to BASIC OPERATION Control range: +5 (downward) to –5 (upward) Initial setting: 0 Choices: CENTER, MAIN Initial setting: CENTER PREPARATION Control range: –4 to 0 Initial setting: 0 INTRODUCTION 13 DISPLAY SET SWFR The input signals are output from the subwoofer. ON -/+ : Select / : Exit Select ON to protect the following features: • DSP program parameters • All SET MENU items • Center, rear speakers, rear center, and subwoofer levels • The on-screen display (OSD) mode English Notes APPENDIX MAIN The input signals are directed to the main L/R speakers with same level. • When “14 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot use the test tone. • When “14 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot select any other SET MENU items. 65 ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS You can adjust the output level of each effect speaker (center, left and right rear and subwoofer) while listening to a music source. Adjustment should be made with the remote control. TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR 3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level. • The control range for the center or left and right rear speakers is from +10 dB to –10 dB. • The control range for the subwoofer is from 0 dB to –20 dB. LEARN + SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP TV VOL 6CH INPUT A PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R REC AUDIO DISC SKIP + CH – VOL D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD – LEVEL TITLE SELECT POWER POWER TV AV AMP – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET + ON SCREEN – STEREO DISPLAY EFFECT 3 1 Press AMP to select the AMP mode. 2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the speaker(s) you want to adjust. Each time you press LEVEL, the selected speaker changes and appears on the front panel display and on the video monitor as follows: center, right rear, rear center, left rear and subwoofer. AMP LEVEL TITLE TV INPUT Center speaker output level Right rear speaker output level Rear center speaker output level Left rear speaker output level Subwoofer output level y • Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker(s) to be adjusted by pressing d / u. 66 TV VOL – Notes CH TV VOL RETURN 2 + PRESET TEST REC MUTE MENU CH PRESET A/B/C/D/E TV INPUT CH 1 SET MENU + TV VOL TV MUTE SELECT PRESET • When the speaker output modes for “1A CENTER SP” and “1C REAR L/R SP” are set to NONE, and “1E LFE/BASS OUT” to MAIN, the output level of those speakers cannot be adjusted because there is no sound coming from these speakers. • When you adjust the output level with LEVEL, the settings you made with the test tone will be changed. • It is recommended to adjust the speakers (except for a subwoofer) by following the steps described in Using the Test Tone on pages 25 and 26. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, set the output level again. SLEEP TIMER Canceling the Sleep Timer Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears on the front panel display. After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, the “SLEEP” indicator goes off and the display returns to the previous indication. The sleep timer can only be set with the remote control. INTRODUCTION Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the standby mode after the amount of time you have set. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off the external components connected to AC OUTLET(S). SLEEP y • The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by setting this unit in the standby mode by using STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) or by disconnecting the AC power cord from the AC outlet. Setting the Sleep Timer TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR y LEARN SYSTEM STANDBY SLEEP 6CH INPUT A PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD 2 BASIC OPERATION POWER SELECT POWER POWER TV AV AMP Select a source and start playback on the source component. 2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. The SLEEP indicator flashes while switching the amount of time for sleep timer. VCR 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R SLEEP ADDITIONAL INFORMATION VCR2/DVR ADVANCED OPERATION 1 V AUX PREPARATION • By connecting a commercially available timer to this unit, you can also set a wake-up timer. Refer to the operation instructions of the timer. TUNER CD PHONO SLEEP VOLUME DSP DIGITAL SLEEP SP A 120min L R APPENDIX The “SLEEP” indicator soon lights up on the front panel display after the sleep timer has been set. The display then returns to the previous indication. V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO SLEEP VOLUME DSP DIGITAL SP A CONCERT HALL L R English 67 ZONE 2 (For U.S.A., Canada and Australia models) You can make up a multi-room audio system with this unit. You can enjoy an audio source selected with INPUT l / h (or input selector buttons) in the second room (Zone 2). Only analog signals are sent to the second room. For any source you want to listen to in the second room, you must connect the analog output jack from the source to the corresponding analog input jack on this unit. To use the multi-room functions of this unit, you need the following additional equipment: • An infrared signal receiver in the second room • An infrared emitter in the main room This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second room to the main room (for example, to a CD player or LD player). • An amplifier and speakers for the second room y OUT IN IN OUT REMOTE CONTROL OUT This unit • Since there are so many ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-room installation, we recommend that you consult with the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for the Zone 2 connections which will best meet your requirements. • Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE CONTROL OUT jack of this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to use an infrared emitter. Up to 6 YAMAHA components can be connected as shown. ■ Example of a system configuration and connections ZONE 2 AUDIO OUT Main room Second room Amplifier CD player (or other component) Infrared signal receiver This unit CD INPUT Remote control REMOTE CONTROL OUT Infrared emitter REMOTE CONTROL OUT REMOTE CONTROL IN Notes • When not using the main room, turn down the volume of this unit in the main room. Adjust the Zone 2 volume with the control on the amplifier in the second room. • DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature for CDs encoded with DTS to avoid unexpected noise. 68 ZONE 2 ■ Special considerations when using DTS software 5 Press SELECT k to display “ZONE2” in the display window. Due to this characteristic of DTS encoded discs, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. 6 POWER Press an input selector button to select the input source you want to watch or listen to in the second room. The display window shows “2: name of selected input” if the remote control is in the Zone 2 mode. A PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX D-TV/LD CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD Note • The SYSTEM POWER, STANDBY and MUTE button on the remote control works for the second room. However Zone 2 volume cannot be adjusted with the remote control. Use the control on the amplifier in the second room. 7 Remote Control in Zone 2 You can control the component by using the component control area buttons. REC AUDIO DISC SKIP In the second room (Zone 2), the supplied remote control can be used for the Zone 2 remote control. You can select the input source and control the component which is located in the main room directly from the second room regardless of the listening condition in the main room. ADVANCED OPERATION – LEVEL TITLE SET MENU + TV VOL TV INPUT – 2 + VOL CH 1 Repeat steps 1 and 2 of the procedure in “Setting the Manufacturer Code” on page 45. MUTE MENU A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TEST ON SCREEN TV VOL STEREO RETURN – DISPLAY HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER MOVIE THEATER 1 EFFECT Press j / i to select “L:AMP”. 5 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 7 8 SELECT EX/ES 10 6 11 12 CH – TV MUTE SELECT CH 0 +10 CHP/INDEX + PRESET 8 TV VOL – 3 /DTS SUR. Press SELECT k / n to exit from the Zone 2 mode. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION + ROCK CONCERT TV VOL PRESET BASIC OPERAIONT For CDs encoded with DTS DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature for CDs encoded with DTS to avoid unexpected noise. POWER PREPARATION For LDs or DVDs encoded with DTS Only 2-channel analog audio signals may be sent to the second room, as follows: • LDs Set your LD player’s left and right outputs to the analog soundtrack. • DVDs Use the disc menu to set the DVD player’s mixed 2channel left and right audio outputs to the PCM or Dolby Digital soundtrack. SELECT INTRODUCTION The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Therefore, if you attempt to send the DTS signal to the second room, you will only be able to hear the digital noise sound that could damage your speakers. Press u / d to select “Zone2”. SELECT + POWER CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET APPENDIX TV VOL POWER CH + PRESET TV VOL – 4 Press LEARN to complete the Zone 2 setup. LEARN English 69 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING What is a Sound Field? What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. ■ Elements of a sound field In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field: Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms – 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only — for example, from the ceiling or a wall. Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound. Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface — walls, ceiling, the back of the room — so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberation taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field processor. 70 Sound Field Program Parameters DSP programs consist of some parameters to determine the apparent room size, reverberation time, distance from you to the performer, etc. In each program, these parameters are set with values precisely calculated by YAMAHA to create a sound field unique to the program. It is recommended to use DSP programs without changing the values of parameters; however, this unit also allows you to create your own sound fields. Starting with one of the built-in programs, you can adjust those parameters. Each DSP program has a set of parameters that allow you to change the characteristics of the acoustic environment to precisely create the effect you want. These parameters correspond to the many natural acoustic factors that create the sound field you experience in an actual concert hall or other listening environment. The size of the room, for example, affects the length of time between the early reflections. The “ROOM SIZE” parameter provided in many of the DSP programs alters the timing between these reflections, thus changing the shape of the “room” you are listening. In addition to room size, the shape of the room and the characteristics of its surfaces have a significant effect on the final sound. Surfaces that absorb sound, for example, cause the reflections and reverberations to die out more quickly, while highly reflective surfaces allow the reflections to carry on for a longer period of time. The digital sound field parameters allow you to control these and many other factors that contribute to your personal sound field, allowing you to essentially “redesign” the concert halls, theaters, etc. provided to create custom-tailored listening environments that ideally match your mood and music. See “DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS” on pages 72 to 75. SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING 4 Changing Parameter Settings Press u / d to select the parameter. CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + INTRODUCTION You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory-set parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. + TV VOL PRESET TV VOL – 5 Adjustments should be made with the remote control. Press j / i to change the parameter value. + TV VOL y CH – • We recommended that you edit the parameter while using a video monitor. It is easier to see the video monitor than it is to see the front panel display. TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TV VOL – TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR • When you set the parameter to a value other than the factoryset value, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the parameter name on the video monitor. LEARN SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP 6CH INPUT A PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD REC AUDIO + DISC SKIP 6 VOL – LEVEL SET MENU + TITLE SELECT TV VOL TV INPUT TV AV TV MUTE SELECT – AMP – DISPLAY HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER MOVIE THEATER 1 6 7 8 SELECT EX/ES 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX /DTS SUR. 9 3 4 2 EFFECT 5 2 STEREO RETURN MOVIE THEATER 2 1 + ON SCREEN TV VOL 5 REC CH PRESET TEST Press AMP to select the AMP mode. AMP appears in the display window on the remote control. AMP Turn on the video monitor and press ON SCREEN repeatedly to select the full display mode. ON SCREEN 3 DISPLAY Select a DSP program you want to adjust. HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 2 3 4 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER MOVIE THEATER 1 5 6 7 8 SELECT EX/ES MOVIE THEATER 2 /DTS SUR. 9 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX Program No. Program name P04 ROCK CONCERT ≥ DSP LEVEL…………0dB INIT.DLY…………15ms ROOM SIZE…………1.0 LIVENESS…………………5 REV.TIME…………1.6s REV.DELAY……120ms Parameters Parameter valves Example of the parameter setting display Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the parameter value you edited will return to the factory setting. If so, edit the parameter value again. Resetting a Parameter to the Factory-set Value ■ To reset some of the parameters to the factory-set values Select the parameter you want to reset. Then press and hold j / i until the value temporarily stops at the factoryset value. The asterisk mark (*) by the parameter name disappears on the video monitor. ■ To reset all of the parameters to the factory-set values 71 English Use “9 PARAM. INI” on the SET MENU to reset all of the parameter values of all DSP programs within the selected group to the factory-set values (see page 63). This operation resets all of the parameter values of all DSP programs within that group to the factory-set values. APPENDIX Cursor • The available parameters may be displayed on more than one OSD page for some of the programs. To scroll through pages, press u / d. • You cannot change parameter values when “14 MEMORY GUARD” on the SET MENU is set to ON. If you want to change the parameter values, set “14 MEMORY GUARD” to OFF (see page 65). ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1 ENTERTAINMENT Notes ADVANCED OPERATION PRESET BASIC OPERATION 1 POWER Repeat steps 3 to 5 above as necessary to change other program parameters. MENU A/B/C/D/E CH POWER MUTE PREPARATION y DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program. ■ DSP LEVEL Function: Description: Control Range –6dB – +3 dB This parameter adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on the acoustics of you listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level relative to the direct sound. ■ INIT. DLY (Initial Delay) [P. INT. DLY for the presence sound field] Function: Description: Control Range 1 – 99 msec This parameter changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther the apparent distance seems. For a small room, this parameter would be set to a small value, and for a large room, it would be set to a large value. Source Sound Level Level Level Early Reflections Time Time INIT.DLY Time INIT.DLY INIT.DLY Sound Source Reflection Face Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms ■ ROOM SIZE [P. ROOM SIZE for the presence sound field] Function: Description: Control Range 0.1 – 2.0 This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room. Time Early Reflections Time Level Level Level Source Sound Time Sound Source Small value = 0.1 72 Large value = 2.0 DIGITAL SOUND SOUND FIELD FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS EDITING ■ LIVENESS Function: This parameter adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. The LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the room. Source Sound Level Level Dead PREPARATION Level Live Time Time Time Sound Source Small Reflected Sound Large Reflected Sound Function: Large value = 10 Control Range 0 – 49 msec (The range depends on the signal format.) This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the surround sound. This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two rear channels are used. ■ S. ROOM SIZE (Surround Room Size) Function: Control Range 1 – 49 msec Control Range 0.1 – 2.0 This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. ■ S. LIVENESS (Surround Liveness) This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field. ■ RC. INIT. DLY (Rear Center Initial Delay) Function: Control Range 0.1 – 2.0 This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the rear center sound field. Control Range 0 – 10 This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the rear center sound field. APPENDIX ■ RC. LIVENESS (Rear Center Liveness) Function: Control Range 1 – 49 msec This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the rear center sound field. ■ RC. ROOM SIZE (Rear Center Room Size) Function: Control Range 0 –10 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Function: ADVANCED OPERATION ■ S. INIT. DLY (Surround Initial Delay) Function: BASIC OPERATION Small value = 0 ■ S. DELAY (Surround Delay) INTRODUCTION Description: Control Range 0 – 10 English 73 DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ REV. TIME (Reverberation Time) Function: Description: Control Range 1.0 – 5.0 sec This parameter adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB (at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments. Reverberation Source Sound Reverberation Early Reflections 60 dB 60 dB REV. TIME Sound Source 60 dB REV. TIME REV. TIME Long Reverberation Short Reverberation Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s ■ REV. DELAY (Reverberation Delay) Function: This parameter adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment. Level Description: Control Range 0 – 250 msec Source Sound (dB) 60 dB Reverberation Time REV. DELAY REV. TIME ■ REV. LEVEL (Reverberation Level) Control Range 0 – 100 % This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. Level Function: Description: Source Sound REV. LEVEL Time 74 DIGITAL SOUND SOUND FIELD FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS EDITING For 6ch Stereo ■ CT LEVEL (Center Level) These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode. ■ RL LEVEL (Rear Left Level) Function: ■ RR LEVEL (Rear Right Level) Function: Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for wraparound effect. Control Range –3 – STD – +3 Gradually adjusts the soundfield either towards the front or towards the rear. ■ CT WIDTH (Center Width) Control Range 0 – 7 Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. BASIC OPERATION ■ DIMENSION Function: Control Range OFF/ON PREPARATION Music ■ PANORAMA Function: Control Range 0 – 100 % These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode. For PRO LOGIC Function: Control Range 0 – 100 % These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode. ■ RC LEVEL (Rear Center Level) Function: Control Range 0 – 100 % These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode. INTRODUCTION Function: Control Range 0 – 100 % For DTS Neo: 6 Music Function: Control Range 0 – 0.5 This parameter adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. ADVANCED OPERATION ■ C. IMAGE (Center Image) ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 75 TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, or enters in the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. On-screen display does not appear. No sound and/or no picture. 76 Cause Remedy The power cord is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Firmly connect the power cord. The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on the rear panel is not fully set to the left or right position. Set the switch fully to the left or right position when this unit is in the standby mode. The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity). Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, and start operating. The setting for the on-screen display is set to “DISPLAY OFF”. Select the full display or short display mode (see page 23). The GRAY BACK setting under “13 DISPLAY SET” on the SET MENU is set to OFF, and no video signal is input to this unit. Set GRAY BACK to AUTO to always show the OSD (see page 65). Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. An appropriate input source has not been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT or 6CH (INPUT) (or the input selector buttons) (see page 27). The speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections (see page 11). The main speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the main speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or B (see page 27). The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume (see page 28). The signals that this unit cannot reproduce such as a CD-ROM are being input. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. The output and input for the picture are connected to different types of video jacks. Make connections using the same type of jack (between S VIDEO, VIDEO (composite), or COMPONENT VIDEO jacks) for both the input and output. TROUBLESHOOTING Cause The sound suddenly goes off. The protection circuit has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Remedy Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch is set to the appropriate position and then turn this unit back on. Check the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. No sound from the effect speakers. Turn on the power, and play the source again. The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume (see page 28). Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. Incorrect setting of “3 L/R BALANCE” on the SET MENU. Adjust it to the appropriate position. The sound effect is off. Press STEREO/EFFECT to turn it on (see page 33). PREPARATION Only the speaker on one side can be heard. The sleep timer has functioned. BASIC OPERAIONT The source encoded with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal does not have a center, rear L/R or rear center channel signals. A 96-kHz sampling digital signal is being input to this unit. No sound from the center speaker. “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE. Select the appropriate mode for your center speaker (see page 56). One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 5 except for Game and 6ch Stereo) has been selected. Select another DSP program. The output level of the rear speakers is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the rear speakers (see pages 25, 26). “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE. Select the appropriate speaker mode for the rear L/R speakers (see page 57). A monaural source is being played with the program 10. Select another DSP program. “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE. If the speaker mode for the rear L/R speakers is set to NONE, the speaker mode for the rear center speaker is automatically set to NONE. Select the appropriate speaker mode for the rear L/R speaker mode (see page 57). “1D REAR CT SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE. Select LRG or SML (see page 58). “1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU is set to MAIN when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Select SWFR or BOTH (see page 58). “1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU is set to SWFR or MAIN when a 2-channel source is being played. Select BOTH (see page 58). APPENDIX No sound from the subwoofer. Raise the level of the center speaker (see pages 25, 26). ADDITIONAL INFORMATION No sound from the rear center speaker. The output level of the center speaker is set to minimum. ADVANCED OPERATION No sound from the rear speakers. INTRODUCTION Problem English The source does not contain low bass signals (90 Hz and below). 77 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy Dolby Digital or DTS sources cannot be played. (Dolby Digital or DTS indicator on the front panel display does not light up.) “Digital output” and “Dolby Digital” or “DTS” are not selected on the connected components. Make an appropriate setting following the operation instructions for your component. Poor bass reproduction. “1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU is set to SWFR or BOTH and your system does not include a subwoofer. Select MAIN (see page 58). The output mode for each speaker (main, center, rear, or rear center) on the SET MENU does not match your speaker configuration. Select the appropriate output mode for each speaker based on the size of the speakers in your configuration (see pages 56 to 58). Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. No connection from the turntable to the GND terminal. Connect the grounding cord of your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit (see page 18). The volume level is low while playing a record. The record is being played on a turntable with an MC cartridge. The turntable should be connected to this unit through an MC-head amplifier (see page 17). The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the OUT(REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power to the component. The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect by a recording component. A source cannot be recorded. A source component is connected to the analog input jacks of this unit for digital recording. Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks. Digital connections are not made between this unit and other components for playback or recording. Make digital connections. A source component is connected to the digital input jacks of this unit for analog recording. Connect a source component to the analog input jacks. Analog connections are not made between this unit and other components for playback or recording. Make analog connections. A “humming” sound can be heard. Some recording components cannot record the Dolby Digital or DTS sources. The sound field parameters and some other settings on this unit cannot be changed. “14 MEMORY GUARD” on the SET MENU is set to ON. Select OFF (see page 65). This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. “CHECK SP WIRES” appears on the front panel display. Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 78 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Remedy Cause Turn on the power of this unit. There is noise interference from digital or high-frequency equipment, or this unit. This unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. This unit suddenly turns into the standby mode. The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait until this unit cools down and then turn it back on. PREPARATION This unit is in the standby mode. INTRODUCTION The sound is degraded when listening with headphones connected to a tape deck or CD player that is connected to this unit. ■ Tuner Problem This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Re-store the stations. FM stereo reception is noisy. The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Check the antenna connections. Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. Use the manual tuning method. There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multipath interference. The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The station is too weak. Use the manual tuning method. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for best reception. Use the manual tuning method. There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. There are buzzing and whining noises (especially in the evening). A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AM Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned in. ADVANCED OPERATION FM Remedy BASIC OPERAIONT FM/ AM Cause APPENDIX English 79 TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work nor function properly. Cause Remedy Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel (see page 7). Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. The batteries are weak. Replace the batteries. The manufacturer code has not been correctly set. Set the manufacturer code correctly (see page 45). Try to set the other codes of the same maufacturer (see page 45). The remote control does not “learn” new functions. 80 Even if the maufacturer code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. Program the necessary functions independently into the programmable buttons on this unit‘s remote control using the Learn feature. The batteries of this remote control and/ or the other remote control are too weak. Replace the batteries (see page 3). The distance between the two remote controls is too much or too little. Place the remote controls at the proper distance (see page 47). The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not compatible with this remote control. Learning is not possible. Memory capacity is full. Further learning is not possible without deleting unnecessary functions (see page 47). GLOSSARY ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a six-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system is practically distortion-free, clear 6-channel sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, two rear channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1 channels). ■ Dolby Digital Surround EX ■ Dolby Pro Logic ■ CINEMA DSP D I G I T A L Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater in the listening room of your own home. ■ SILENT CINEMA YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. English Dolby Pro Logic is the improved technique to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround programs. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with two left and right main channels, a center channel, and two left and right rear channels compared with one limited rear channel for the conventional Pro Logic technology. Also the music mode is available for 2channel sources in addition to the movie mode. This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5 channels in a Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel systems. APPENDIX This unit is equipped with the Dolby Digital decoder that can reproduce 5.1-channel sources adding a rear center channel. (The sound to be output from a rear center speaker is created by mixing the content of rear L/R channels.) This decoder is the most suitable to reproduce the soundtrack for the movies recorded by Dolby Digital Surround EX. You can enjoy dynamic and realistic sounds by adding another channel. ■ LFE 0.1 channel ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Neo: 6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6 channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available; “Music mode” for playing music sources and “Cinema mode” for movies. ADVANCED OPERATION ■ Neo: 6 Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With three front channels (left, center and right), and two rear stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides five fullrange audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has a total of 5.1 channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). Using two-channel stereo for the rear speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the five full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with previously unheard of excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. BASIC OPERAIONT ■ Dolby Digital PREPARATION Dolby Surround uses a four analog channel recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: two left and right main channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a rear channel for special sound effects (monaural). The rear channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. INTRODUCTION ■ Dolby Surround 81 GLOSSARY ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP YAMAHA has developed a virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any rear speakers by using virtual rear speakers. It is even possible to enjoy virtual CINEMA DSP in a minimum two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. ■ S VIDEO signal With S VIDEO signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S VIDEO cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. ■ Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB/CB and PR/CR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to use the component signal for output. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. 82 ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. ■ I/O assignment (SET MENU) Although component is normally connected according to jack names shown on the rear panel, this unit includes a function that assigns jacks according to the component being connected. If the component being used differs from the component name shown for this unit’s component video input jacks or digital input/output jacks, it is possible to assign jacks according to the component being connected. This makes it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively connect more component. SPECIFICATIONS FM SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω ..................................... 100 W • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Australia and China models] ....................... 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • Maximum Power (EIAJ) [China model] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ......................................................... 150 W • Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 140/170/205/245 W • Frequency Response CD to Main L/R ...................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω, Main L/R ................................ 0.04% • Selectivity (400 kHz) ............................................................... 70 dB • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ................................................................. 0.2%/0.3% • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 45 dB • Frequency Response ........................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz +0.5, –2 dB • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) PHONO MM to REC OUT (5 mV, shorted) [U.S.A., Canada and China models] ................................. 86 dB [Australia model] ............................................................... 81 dB CD (250 mV, shorted) to Main L/R, Effect Off .................. 100 dB AM SECTION • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Main L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Main L/R ........................ 60 dB/45 dB • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................... AC 120 V/60 Hz [Australia model] ................................................. AC 240 V/50 Hz [China model] ...................................................... AC 220 V/50 Hz • Tone Control (Main L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut ............................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz BASS EXTENSION .................................................. +6 dB/60 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................. 400 W/500 VA [Australia and China models] .............................................. 410 W Standby Mode .............................................................. 1 W or less • Phones Output ........................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω • AC Outlets [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................. 2 (Total 80 W maximum) [China model] ........................................ 2 (Total 50 W maximum) [Australia model] .......................................... 1 (100 W maximum) • Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m GENERAL • Dimension (W x H x D) ................... 435 x 171 x 434 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 17-1/16”) ADVANCED OPERATION • Weight ......................................................................... 15 kg (33 lbs) • Accessories ...................................................................... See page 3 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • Output Level REC OUT .............................................................. 150 mV/1.2 kΩ PRE OUT .................................................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER .......................................................... 4.0 V/1.2 kΩ • Tuning Range ......................................... 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz BASIC OPERAIONT • Input Sensitivity CD, etc .................................................................... 150 mV/47 kΩ PHONO ................................................................... 2.5 mV/47 kΩ 6CH INPUT ............................................................ 150 mV/47 kΩ PREPARATION • Damping Factor 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................... 80 or more • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.) Mono/Stereo ........................ 2.0 µV (17.3 dBf) /25 µV (39.2 dBf) INTRODUCTION AUDIO SECTION *Specifications are subject to change without notice. VIDEO SECTION • Video Signal Type ...................................................... NTSC or PAL • Composite Video Signal Level ...................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω • S-Video Signal Level Y ................................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω C .......................................................................... 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω APPENDIX • Component Video Signal Level Y ................................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω PB/CB, PR/CR ............................................................. 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω • Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................................... 50 dB • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Composite, S-Video ................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB Component ................................................. DC to 60 MHz, –3 dB English 83 U HTR-5590 AV Receiver YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA OWNER’S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia V958320-2 IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference.